Operations Reference. ADC Air Client v3. Operations Reference (Current to Air Client v ) Release: 29-April-2011 Revision: 22-April-2014

Transcription

1 ADC Air Client v3 (Current to Air Client v ) Release: 29-April-2011 Revision: 22-April-2014

2 Publication Information 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential. Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal. This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product. Trademarks Product names and other brands (such as ADC, D-Series, Nexio, Nexio Insight, Nexio Motion, PowerSmart, Versio ) are trademarks or trade names of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies. Contact Information Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location and contact information see: Support Contact Information For domestic and international support contact information see: Support Contacts: ecustomer Portal: Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 2 of 288

3 Contents Contents Air Client Overview About Air Client Minimum System Requirements About Playlists About Events About Time Zones About using Dual Output Video Cards Air Client Desktop Menus File Menu Edit Menu Events Menu Servers menu (for sites using Multi-server login) Resources Menu Properties Menu Tools Menu Window Menu View Menu Help Menu Playlist Right-Click Menu Toolbar Control Panels Hardware Control Panels Software Control Panel Transmission List Window Event Types Event Data Fields Playlist Window Event Data Fields Getting Started To Launch Air Client To Stop Air Client Air Client User Authentication Assigning an Administrator Password Managing Server Connections Connecting to a Server Disconnecting from a Server Traffic-Generated Lists To Save the Desktop Keyboard Shortcuts A list of shortcut commands On-Air Playback Operations About On-Air Playback To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List To Build a Play List File To Save a Playlist file as Text To Open an Existing Playlist To Insert a Play List file to the Transmission List To Append a Play List file to the Transmission List Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 3 of 288

4 Contents To generate a MisMatch List To Load a List To Run the Transmission List To Air a Live Event Join an Event in Progress To Join a Server-Based Event in Progress To Join a Tape Event in Progress Using a Program Delay Event for Roll Under To Preview Play Thread, Unthread, Recue an Event Using the VTR Device Control Panel Using the VDCP Device Control Panel To Set on Air Focus Calculate Durations of Multiple Events Find an ID To Find the Next Occurrence of an ID in a List To Set a Hard Start Event To Toggle a Hard Start Toggle Look Ahead To Toggle Look Ahead Managing List Confirmations Managing Secondary Events on a Playlist To Show / Hide Secondary Events About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide Using Air Protect To Use Air Protect To Check Switcher Control Reviewing Tally status information in the As Run log text file Tally: On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the list Log format Extended Play Mix/Wipes Early Example: Automatic Duration Update on the Playlist Manage the Operation Log To Open the Operation Log in Air Client To Export the Textfile Operation Log Playlist Editing Operations To Open an Existing Playlist Inserting Primary Events To Insert a Primary Event Inserting Multi-Segment Events To Insert a Segment Managing Duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs Insert Secondary Events To Insert a Secondary Event Configuring an Editable Secondary Event Manage Back-Timed Events Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed To Specify PT Event Type syntax Manage End-Timed Events Secondary Events that can be End-Timed To Specify PT Event Type syntax Enable a List Freeze Enable a Data Event (sdat) Data Event Commands Add a Transition Effect Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 4 of 288

5 Contents Cut, Copy, Paste Playlist Events To Cut an Event from a Playlist To Copy an Event from a Playlist To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s) Copy/Paste Cells Clear / Delete Playlist Events Moving Events within a List and Between Lists Open the source List(s) To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event To Drag-and-Drop Multiple events Move Events using Copy / Paste Revise Playlist Event Field Text Clear Done Events Replace an Event ID Ripple Time To Manually Ripple Times Checking if a List is Timed Out Managing Pull Lists Review Missing Events using the Pull List Window GMT Pull Lists Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List Recycle Bin Window Retrieve Deleted Events from the Recycle Bin Window About Configuring the Recycle Bin Saving a Play List File Managing Resource Windows Robust Database Search Window To Search for a Record Managing Search Results To Copy a Record to a Transmission List To Drag & Drop a Record to a Transmission List Device Status Window To Open the Device Status Window Device Storage Window To Open the Device Storage Window To Refresh a Window Protecting and Removing Spots To Check or Search for a record Moving Spots and Records to Playlists More Info Window To Display the More Info Window Video Window To Display the Video Window Managing Compile Lists About the Compiler Option Creating a Compile List To view the individual spots of a compile tape To remove all spots from a compile list window To prepare a list for compiling Compiling a Compile List Recompiling a Compile List Other Compile List Functions Jam New IDs Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 5 of 288

6 Contents Mark Exception Thread Into VTR Error Management About Displaying Errors To View Error Logs To Display Errors Clearing Error Messages from the Air Client Desktop To Clear Error Messages List Validation Emergency Operations Main/Backup Changeover Recovery Steps System Power Up and Down Sequences Automated Recording Record Lists Key Elements Running the Record List Record List Tips/Troubleshooting Secondary Records Key Elements Inputting Secondary Record Events Secondary Record Entry Guidelines Basic Functions of the Secondary Record Secondary Recording to Video Disk Secondary Recording to Tape Database Logging To activate this option Barcode Event Introduction VTR Playlist Assignment VTR as Assigned Device VTR as a Floater Machine Barcode Event Step by Step Barcode Event Scenarios Scenario 1: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has an automation database record Scenario 2: Using Barcode Event for a tape that does not have an automation database record (Manually entering SOM) Scenario 3: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has bad or no timecode Logging Error Logs To Display an Error Log Asrun Logs To Display Asrun Logs WinCmms About Traffic Translator Using the Translator Program WinCmms Setup Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 6 of 288

7 Contents To Install WinCmms To Put a Shortcut on the Desktop To Change the Default Directories and Options Global Media Transfer (GMT) GMT Overview GMT Transfer Modes GMT Components A Simple GMT System FlexSync About the Air Client ADC FlexSync TM Option Implementation Deployment and Workflows LinkList About LinkList Air Client Installation To Install Air Client on a Workstation Default.ini Settings About XP settings and LANACFG settings Create a Desktop Shortcut for Air Client Create an Air Client shortcut in the Start Menu Create a Shortcut on the Desktop for a Local Instance Create a Shortcut on the Desktop for a Remote WAN or LAN Instance Configuring System Components Configuring Multiple Device Server Connections To Add, Edit, or Remove a Server Configuring Playlist Options Configuring Window Column Settings Configuring Window Font Settings Configuring Window Parameter Colors Configuring System Properties Environment Properties As-Run Log Properties Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties To Configure the LCP-20 panel To Configure the Operator Control Panel (OCP) Setting Software Control Panel Properties Valid IDs List Names Auto List Save Auto Bin Save Error Reporting Properties About Errors in Multi-Login Mode Desktop Display Properties Saving the Desktop LinkList More Info Hide Secondary Event Keys Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 7 of 288

8 Contents Configuration of the Hide Secondary Event keys Toolbar Builder Configuring Time Zone Offsets To setup TimeZone Offsets Operation Log Set Tally To Set a Tally Appendix A Event Type Field Values Appendix B Secondary Events To access an editable secondary event already in a play Secondary Switching Parameter (ssp) Secondary Audio/Video (sav) Back Timed Secondary Audio/Video (bav) GPI Contact (sgpi) Back Timed GPI (bgpi) Keyer On/Off (skey) A/V Keyer On/Off Transition Keyer Audio Over On/Off (saov) Transition Audio Over (stao) Break Comment (****) Compile ID (cmid) Data Event (sdat) Barter Spot (sbar) Record Switcher (srsw) Switcher Crosspoint (sxp) Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT) Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT) Secondary Record (srec) Break Sync (ssyn) Secondary System (ssys) Backtimed System (bsys) System Event External (vdt) Data Event with Data (sdat) Appendix C Device Error Messages Appendix D Rebuilding an Air Client Back Rev Add NetBEUI and TCP/IP Protocols Install Lana Config Utility Map Network drives Install and Configure ODBC About Installing the Air Client software Appendix E Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 8 of 288

9 Contents System Timing Verify the source VTR and router's accuracy Verify the Video Servers' accuracy Appendix F Tips and Good Habits The TWO Golden Rules Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 9 of 288

10 Air Client Overview Air Client Overview About Air Client The Air Client workstation is a client on the ADC playout automation network. Air Client provides: Integrated control of broadcast devices, such as cart machines, VTRs, still stores, character generators, master control switchers and video disk servers. Automated playout. Each event in a playlist plays at its start time without operator intervention. In problematic situations, operators may intervene at anytime to change playlists and control devices using the mouse, keyboard and hardware control panel. Allows Play List files to be edited and created with secondary events and transition effects for broadcast. While these Play List files are typically generated by a traffic department placed into the transmission list, they may also be created manually with the Air Client. Transmission list to control the actual playout of events. Events may be cut, copied, pasted, dragged and dropped within the transmission list. New play list files may be appended to the current on-air transmission list to form a single, continuous playout list. Each event in a Transmission List will play at its start time without operator intervention. As needed, operators may intervene using the mouse, keyboard and/or hardware control panel. Minimum System Requirements The following are minimum system requirements for ADC Automation system components as of the release of this document. Supported Database The following databases are supported: SQL 2005, SQL 2005 Express, SQL 2008, SQL 2008 Express Server Requirements Type Hardware Software Requirements - Device Server (PCI Chassis) - Device Controller (CHP chassis: Common Hardware Platform) Device Sever v11.58.x or Higher Note: If an older version of Device Server is used, contact 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 10 of 288

11 Air Client Overview Type Operating System Network Interface Card Requirements Technical Support for compatibility Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional w/ SP4 - PCI or CHP chassis - NetBEUI only - (See below: IMPORTANT Note on Windows Operating System Support.) Microsoft Windows XP Professional w/ SP3 - CHP chassis only - NetBIOS-Over-TCP/IP - GigE Ethernet. Microsoft Windows Server CHP chassis only - GigE Ethernet - NetBIOS-Over-TCP/IP - (In conjunction w/ Windows 7 Clients) Requires Device Sever v or higher When communicating via NETBIOS over TCP/IP a Gigabit NIC and switch is required Client Requirements IMPORTANT Note on Merge of Client V3 and V4 Development Streams: The next versions of Air Client / Media Client for Device Server v11 and Device Server v12 shall be merged into single Air Client and Media Client streams. Thereby the next released version of clients will be 4.16 and these versions shall be compatible with both the v11.59 and v12.15 and higher of Device Server software. For more details, please contact Automation Technical Support. IMPORTANT Note on Windows Operating System Support: ADC Air Client and Media Client versions listed for this release have been tested only on Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 7. The ADC Device Server version listed for this release has been tested only on Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Server For customers with existing Client and Device Server PCs running Microsoft Windows 2000, we believe that there should be no issue with installing this version on those existing PCs. However, we no longer test nor provide support for this configuration. Furthermore, all future client versions, starting with v4.16 will require Microsoft Windows 7 Pro (32-bit) operating system. For more details, please contact Automation Technical Support. Type Hardware Requirements Processor Pentium GHz or greater RAM - 512MB or greater HD 80 GB Hard Drive or greater (Required: 25MB of free Hard Drive Space) 2 TCP 1000BT NICs 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 11 of 288

12 Air Client Overview Type Requirements Network Interface Card Software Operating System Configuration/Parameters Additional Intel Network Interface Cards (Pro 100S) may be required for systems connecting to external networks, or a database using TCP/IP. When communicating via NETBIOS over TCP/IP a Gigabit NIC and switch is required. - Air Client release v3.58.x or higher - Media Client release v3.58.x or higher See below: Important Note about nbios32.dll and apilib32.dll.) Microsoft Windows XP Professional w/ SP3 - (Using NetBIOS-Over-TCP/IP) Microsoft Windows 7 - (In conjunction w/ Windows Server 2008 Device Servers.) - Requires Air Client v or higher - Requires Media Client v or higher System needs to be set up to use ODBC Important Note about nbios32.dll and apilib32.dll: Care should be taken with regards to the support.dll files- nbios32.dll and apilib32.dll- used on various components of the system. The Device Servers and all clients should use the version.dlls supplied with this release and this same version should be used on all clients interconnecting with this release. The current and recent versions of Air Client and Media Client- all versions of Air Client from A forward and all versions of Media Client from forward- will normally install the same versions. However, the versions installed on each client should be verified, as it is possible for earlier.dlls to have been substituted. About GigE Ethernet Environments It is recommended that a full GigE Ethernet environment be used for both client and server. While a mixed GigE /100M or 100M environment will work, it will result in a maximum 100M performance! Gigabit Ethernet (1000Mb) networks are strongly recommended for all 11.x installations. The majority of development and testing of ADC is done in this environment and certain assumptions have and will be made based on this. However, this impacts all aspects of existing installations- device controllers, clients, file servers, network switches, and wiring. Therefore, testing has been done to assure that ADC 11.x can be successfully deployed on existing LAN networks. Note that this assumes that there are no major changes to the system scope from the existing operation- the 11.x is built and configured in the same general manner as the previous version that it replaces. While a complete replacement or upgrading of all the affected components is the ideal course of action, this is of course not possible or practical in all cases. It is acceptable to replace or upgrade portions of the system, but be aware that doing so may provide no immediate benefit- depending on the combination of devices, portions of the system, or the system as a whole, may be limited by the lowest speed component still in place, regardless of other factors. Contact you Imagine Communications representative for assistance in the planning and deployment of new and upgraded components Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 12 of 288

13 Air Client Overview About Playlists Familiarity with playlists is essential to use Air Client effectively. Playlists are files that contain events to play, record, or compile. Playlists can be created and stored locally at the Air Client workstation or translated from traffic schedules. They can also be stored on the ADC file server and are available to all operators on the system for viewing and editing. When a playlist is loaded into a transmission list window, it is called a transmission list. About Events Familiarity with events is essential to use Air Client effectively. An event contains information, such as start time, event type, material identification (ID), title, segment number, duration, start of message and channel output. Primary Events Primary events, such as programs and commercials, constitute the majority of a playlist s events. They may be accompanied by secondary events, and transition effects. Event Type Field Values There are several event types you can use to indicate how an event is played. For example, if you just want an event to play without switching or threading, you would choose Play (P) as the primary event type. The primary event types are described below: Play (P): An event will play without switching or threading. Switch (S): An event will switch without threading or playing. Thread (T): An event will thread without switching or playing. Auto (A): An event will switch, play and thread. Auto is the default setting for most primary events. Alternatively, a PT (play and thread) can be used to play and thread, but not switch. Record (R): A record event initiates recording on a device at the time specified in the event s time field. Timed (O): Denotes that the event is a hard start event which automatically threads and plays at the time specified in the event s Time field. Upcounting (U): Use an upcount event for an event of unknown duration, such as a sporting event or any other live broadcast. During playout, the event s duration will count down to 00:00:00.00 and then will count back up. This repeats until terminated by either pressing Play or Skip on the control panel or a contact start is reached. The next event will play normally. Up counters only work on events played from Switch-Only devices. Manual Start (M): Use a manual start event to provide the equivalent of a break event during the transmission of a playlist. When playing, a list will stop when it reaches a manual start event. Click Play on the control panel. Exception (X): This is a customized primary event in configurations that have a primary program channel and regional feeds to play different commercials to different regions Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 13 of 288

14 Air Client Overview Exception events are different on a regional feed from those played on the primary program channel. X is only used on a compile tape. Time to Next (N): Enter a letter N in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide a countdown to the event s start time. This is used primarily on live events so an operator can give an accurate countback from a break back into a live event, such as a newscast. Deadroll (D): A deadroll event hard starts at a specific time while the list plays. The deadroll event plays, but does not switch, for its duration and then stops. Deadroll events are only intended for use on linear media (tapes) so that a JIP (Join In Progress) can be performed. Audio/Video Breakaway (AV, AI, AVJ, AIJ): A primary event or a secondary audio/video event can be run and cause the switcher to perform an audio/ video breakaway. AV is an event type that performs a video breakaway. AI performs audio breakaways. To rejoin the secondary audio/video breakaway to the primary audio/video input when it finishes playing, edit the event type to AVJ or AIJ. A breakaway event can occur at the beginning, within and the end of its associated primary event. When used at the beginning or end, the primary event type is set to A; the secondary event type is set to AV or AI. If the duration of the secondary event is less than the primary event, add a J to supply the audio and video from the primary event. When used within a primary event, the secondary event type is set to AVJ or AIJ. Note: Only one breakaway can be assigned to a primary event to avoid an overlap in time. You cannot breakaway audio and then breakaway video until the video is rejoined. Also, you cannot breakaway video and then breakaway audio until the audio is rejoined. Secondary events Secondary events are associated with the primary event above it in the playlist. Multiple secondary events can be assigned to a primary event and are played concurrently. A secondary event s time is used as an offset in relation to the primary event s time. Valid secondary events include: Audio/Video: A secondary Audio/Video event plays material, in addition to the primary event on air, for use in effects such as keys, audio overs and mixes. Backtimed A/V: The backtimed secondary audio/video event is the same as a Secondary Audio/ Video except the secondary s on-air time is the amount of time before the primary event will begin. GPI Contact: This event is a GPI Contact Closure to a device that initiates a switch. The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time. Backtimed GPI: Similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before the start of the associated primary event. A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In this case, the system would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event. Keyer On/Off: This event describes when a hole is cut in the associated primary events video output and is then filled with the output of the Keyer source. Transition Key: Similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of the associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut, wipe etc.) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 14 of 288

15 Air Client Overview Audio Over On/Off: This is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source. It can be set with a percentage over ratio for example, if set to 100%, it will completely replace the primary events audio Transition Audio Over: Similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with the primary event and corresponding transition type. Break: An event line inserted in the list where you would like the list to stop running. The first event after the break line will cue up, but will not play out, and the program switches to black. To restart the list [after the break line], press Roll or Play on the control panel. Comment: Used to enter Notes into the playlist. Comment event lines are ignored during transmission. However, they do add events to the list size. You can enter text in the title field up to sixteen characters Compile ID: Used to attach a title to the head of a compilation list. It has no effect on the playlist and is ignored during transmission Data Event: Used as a command to a device to perform a certain function. Occurs at the time entered in the on-air [or Time] column. Mostly used with videodisk servers. Barter Spot: Intended for reconciliation with the traffic system. Attached to a program segment that has barter spots in it [network, nat l]. Will appear in the As Run log that the spots attached to that segment ran Record Switcher: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a recording, automation will switch to the source denoted in the secondary events Title field. Switcher Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. Allows you to route program from one list to a different destination. Secondary Record: Allows for the automated recording and segmenting of live program material, for immediate or future playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event type is used in lists that combine record and playback activities. It will function only in lists that combine record and playback material. Break Sync: Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a time for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event. Secondary System: Used to allow the sharing of resources between lists. This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move un-owned device heads to the list that is running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads. Backtimed System: This works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event type runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field. External: An External secondary event is used to send commands or other information to a device through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands or other information to a specific device on the device server. Data Event With Data: This event is used to send commands and other information to a specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 15 of 288

16 Air Client Overview Transition Effects A transition effect is configurable according to type, speed, key hold status, and mixed audio/video and wipe effect qualifiers. Transition effects are added between events in a playlist. A master control switcher is required to use transition effects. The system transitions INTO events only. Therefore, specifying a transition type or speed on an event affects how that event is transitioned TO. Switch-Only IDs You can create a list of frequently used, switch-only IDs that are not in the database, yet are valid. Air Client can be configured to validate IDs against this list by clicking the Check IDs Against Valid ID List button on the List Options tab in the Environment... dialog box (accessible on the Properties menu). By putting IDs in the Valid ID list, Air Client will not generate a warning when editing IDs not in the database. Hard Start Events A hard start event is an event that plays at its start time instead of when the previous event finishes playing. To change an event to a hard start event, click it, then click Toggle Hard Start on the Events menu or press ALT+O. Hard start events display the letter O in the Type field. Extended Secondary Event Types There are two types of extended secondary events: Back-timed events and End-timed events. Using event type qualifiers, the offset times of back-timed and end-timed events can be managed. Offset (Time) indicates how long from starting point an event occurs. It can be longer than the primary event duration (sav, sgpi). Normal Manual Back-Timed End-Timed Last Primary Primary Event Next Primary Back-Timed Events Begin Second Button End A back-timed, secondary event is run at the offset value before the first frame of the primary it is attached to. Backtime modifiers allow backtimed events (such as bgpi, bav, etc) to be replaced and a type of events (end-time) added where the offset is calculated from the end of the show. For more information see Manage Back-Timed Events. Note: It is recommend to stop using backtime event types (such as bgpi, bav, etc) and instead use the normal events (sgpi, sav) with the backtime modifier (PT <) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 16 of 288

17 Air Client Overview End-Timed Events An end-timed, secondary event is run offset from the end of the primary event. End-time modifiers are useful for creating squeeze back when the effect is required to occur from the end of the show. For more information see Manage End-Timed Events. For Example: Attached to the last commercial of commercial break a tone closure needs to be turned on eight seconds before the end of the last break using a GPI event. With a forward offset event, the eight seconds would have to be subtracted from the duration of the primary event and offset from that duration. If the primary event were 30 seconds, then a forward offset would have to be set at 22 seconds. If the commercial break was re-ordered and the last commercial was now a 15 second commercial, the GPI event would have to be edited and the offset changed to 7 seconds. With an end-time offset of 8 seconds, the GPI event would not have to be edited when the commercial break content was changed. About Time Zones Familiarity with Time Zone management is beneficial to using Air Client effectively. In a facility where there is the need to manage local time offsets, all device servers are fed identical time of day time code. This time code is displayed on the device server screen. Client software manages the translation of master time to local time inside the client application. When configured and set to a list, the Time Zone is displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its Zoom window. The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List. In a Pull List window the Time Zone name is displayed in the title bar, and the offset value in the status bar. For more information see Configuring Time Zone Offsets. Time Zone Definitions Master Time: The output of the central facility time standard. It is defined as Zulu format (24 hour) time or military time. It is the time reference that is output from the central facility time code generator and supplied to all Device Servers in a given automation system. This is the only time value displayed on the Device Server s screen and is distributed via the API to the system clients. Local Time: The time standard that is displayed to an operator by a list that is under system management. This time standard is modified from the Master Time delivered to the client by the server over the network by code within the client. Its offset from master time is programmable via software selections in the client. Time Offset: The amount of time (in HH:MM) that the Master Time must be delayed (Or advanced) to account for time zone differences. Local Time Display: The time standard that the list is running under, which is shown to the user at the Client display. This time is derived from the master time by software routines in the client applications Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 17 of 288

18 Air Client Overview Master Time Display: The time standard display that directly reflects the actual time value that is being input to the Device Servers in the central facility. It is normally displayed on the Device Server application window. Time of Day (TOD): A reference to a particular clock time that can be derived from either Master OR Local time. Time of day is not related to event duration. About using Dual Output Video Cards When using Air Client on a dual output video card, if a new window is opened, it appears in the center and can be seen on both monitors. Air Client Desktop Using Air Client requires familiarity with the major components of the Air Client desktop. The major components are the playlist, transmission list, database, device status, device storage windows and the switcher. These components provide access to the core functionality of Air Client. The [ Login name - Client name - Server(s) name Date ] information is dynamically displayed in the title bar of the Air client application Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 18 of 288

19 Air Client Overview Menus All options for the Air Client application are located in a specific menu. This section describes the basic functionality of the options in the various menus. Be advised that while navigating the menus and options the On Air transmission lists will continue to play. Care should be taken to ensure proper monitoring of the transmission lists while navigating in other areas. File Menu Option New PlayList (Ctrl+N) Open Playlist (Ctrl+O) Close Save Playlist (Ctrl+S) Save Playlist As Print (Ctrl+P) Save As Text Display Errors Clear Errors Robust Database Description Opens up an empty play list file to insert programming to be saved for future transmission Allows you to access inactive play list files for editing purposes Closes the active window Permanently saves the work done on an open play list Allows you to create a different filename for an existing play list or create an original filename for a new play list Will print the active screen to an assigned printer Will save the active window as a text file Displays a list of the most recent on-air errors Erases errors displayed on the Air Client from the clipboard only Opens the Robust Database Search window. Allows an operator 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 19 of 288

20 Air Client Overview Option Search Open Text Open Operation Log Save Operation Log as Text Change User Exit (Alt+X) Description to search for and review records of existing spots. Allows you to view text files such as AsRun Logs, and Error Logs The operation log, logs the user activity. Like edition, deletion, and changes to the playlist. Allows you to save the operation log as a text file. Allows you to change the name of the user working at the client station Closes the program and all open windows Edit Menu Option Cut (Ctrl+X) Copy (Ctrl+C) Paste (Ctrl+V) Clear (Del) Find Replace Select All Description Removes selected event(s) and places them onto a clipboard Copies selected event(s) onto a clipboard without removing them from the list Will paste events from the clipboard into the list above the cursor position Will delete selected event(s) from the list, without saving them on the clipboard Allows you to search the active list for media by ID in one direction from the current cursor position Enables you to search for specific IDs and replace them with other IDs Allows you to highlight all events in an open list. Events Menu This menu is available once a Playlist has been loaded 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 20 of 288

21 Air Client Overview Option Revise (Alt+R) Cancel (Alt+Q) Insert Primary (Ins) Insert Secondary Edit Transition Effects Edit Secondary Calculate Durations Toggle Hard Start (Alt+O) Description Allows you to edit or revise the event that the cursor is on. Pressing the Tab key moves you forward one field/cell. Pressing Shift+Tab moves you back. To finish editing press the Alt+R keys Cancels the editing of an event without saving the changes you ve made to it Inserts a Primary event line into the playlist above the cursor position. Automatically puts you into Revise Mode. Press Alt+R keys when done Inserts a Secondary event above the cursor position. Refer to attachment for detailed definitions. *Note*: Some items listed may not be available on your particular system Allows you to modify the transition into the event the cursor is placed on for editing Allows you to edit aspects of certain types of secondary events that are not represented in entry fields on the playlist. Will calculate the total duration for all highlighted items. Cannot be used with Upcount events Places a hard start on the event line the cursor is positioned on. This dictates that the event begins airing at the specified time. Note: It places a hardstart and also removes a hardstart as needed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 21 of 288

22 Air Client Overview Option Ripple Time (Alt+M) List Validation Pull List Verify Event Against DB Verify List Against DB Linked Lists Enabled (Ctrl+F5) Validate Liked List Durations (F5) Copy Linked List In (F9) Copy Linked List Out (F10) Description Ripples air times from cursor placement to the next hard start in a list. If no hard start is present, start times will ripple through the entire playlist List Validation will check through the list for potential problems, such as; same id = same ID back-to-back, separates = segments not separated by a break, sequence = missing segments within a series, or segments out of order, same segment = same segment number back-to-back. Will create a list of events that are scheduled on your playlist but have not been found in assigned air devices. Also known as Missing Media Cross-references the event the cursor is placed upon or the selected events against the database for accuracy of data entry (i.e. Durations, SOMs) Cross-references the entire list against the database for accuracy of data entry (i.e. Durations, SOMs) Select this option to enable the playlist s to be linked together. When ticked, the Master list will control the Linked Lists. List linking can be disabled by unchecking this option, or pressing CTL + F5 to toggle it on/off. Note: Do NOT enable LinkList if there are no Linked Lists configured. This can impact Air Client operations, and will be resolved in a future release. This option is available when LinkList.bin is in the air client install directory. For details see section: LinkList. When multiple events are selected on the Master list, this function will check the duration of the corresponding linked events on the Linked list. Only available for Offline lists. Some or all of the following options are grayed out if: - The Master Online or Offline list is not the active window. - No events are selected on the Master Online or Offline lists. This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled. For details see section: LinkList. If the Master Online transmission list is the active window, this function will copy the selected Master and Linked event(s) on the Offline linked lists to the Online lists. If the Master Offline playlist is the active window, this function will copy the selected Master and Linked events on the Online lists to the Offline lists. This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled. For details see section: LinkList. If the Master Online transmission list is the active window, this function will copy the selected Master and Linked event(s) to the Offline linked lists. If the Master Offline playlist is the active window, this function 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 22 of 288

23 Air Client Overview Option Move Linked List In (F11) Move Linked List Out (F12) Generate Link List Keys Description will copy the selected Master and Linked events to the Online lists. This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled. For details see section: LinkList. This is identical to Copy Linked List In, however the Master and Linked event(s) will be cut from the source list when they are copied. Same as Cut and Paste. This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled. For details see section: LinkList. This is identical to Copy Linked List Out, however the Master and Linked event(s) will be cut from the source list when they are copied. Same as Cut and Paste. This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled. For details see section: LinkList. Only available in Offline mode. This is used to manually generate the LinkKeys for the Offline lists. If your station s traffic system does not generate the Linking keys when the schedules are created, use this option to manually generate the LinkKeys for the Master and Linked Lists. Note: The Offline lists must be resaved after generating the LinkKeys. This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled. For details see section: LinkList. Servers menu (for sites using Multi-server login) Option Connect Disconnect Available Servers Description Select the Device Server(s) to connect the Air Client application to. Note: Up to 25 Device Servers can be configured as available in ADC, but only up to 12 can be connected to at one time. Will disconnect Air Client application from a currently connected device server Shows all available and configured device servers 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 23 of 288

24 Air Client Overview Resources Menu Option View List Switcher Device Status Device Storage Description Allows you to choose and open active transmission list configured in the system A diagnostic utility typically used to determine if switcher(s) are responding correctly to remote commands given by automation. Opens a window by which all automated devices can be checked for correct status and assignments. Allows you to view media in mass storage devices such as Cart Machines, Video Disks, and Audio Disks. You can drag and drop media into an active transmission list if desired Properties Menu Note: New Air Client software modified properties are shown with orange border. Brand new Properties are shown with Red Border Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 24 of 288

25 Air Client Overview Option Environment As Run Logs Hardware Control Panel Software Control Panel Valid IDs List Names Auto List Save Auto Bin Save Errors Desktop Linked Lists More Info Hide Secondary Event Keys Toolbar Builder Description Allows configuration of: List Options, System Directory Paths, List Directory Paths, Device Status Colors, Device Storage Colors, and Cell Colors. Allows custom configuration of the As Run Log Allows custom configuration of hardware panels :LCP-20 system control panel and Operator Control Panel (OCP). Allows custom configuration of the software control panel within the application. Allows creation of a list of IDs that are not in the database that are commonly used for air. This, in general, would include switch-only events (i.e. Network, Newsroom, Studio, Black etc.) Can add, remove, or customize names of transmission lists that will appear in View List [under Resources]. The default is to display only a number for the separate transmission lists at your facility (i.e. play list 1, play list 2) and secondary lists such as Record Lists, Media Lists, and Compile Lists Allows parameters to be set for the Auto List Save feature; such as the frequency of automatic list savings based on the number of list changes that occur on an active on-air transmission list. Specify the Number of changes to indicate how often the list saves to an RCV file automatically. Changes refers mainly to movements of items in the list, 5 changes, means 5 events have passed. So in this example, every time 5 events have passed the list will auto-save to its RCV file. Will save the bin storage map of a cart machine based on user specified intervals Errors - Allows configuration of how/where error messages are displayed and whether they will sound out when they occur Use this menu to configure the way errors are reported in the error window, and to which folder they are to be saved, if they are to be saved to disk. Allows the adjustment of the desktop wallpaper within the Air Client program Launches the Links Lists configuration dialog. LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. When the functionality has been purchased, this option allows the custom configuration of a More Info column using an ODBC database. Allows hiding and showing of secondary events on the Playlist Allows the custom configuration of the Air Client Toolbar on the desktop Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 25 of 288

26 Air Client Overview Option Time Zone Operation Log Set Tally Save Desktop Set Password Description A unique time zone offset can be configured for each play list that is offset from the house clock. A log can be created to track operation activity within the Air Client application. The Air client can use the Tally information of a given List to display an On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom window(s) status column. If a Tally is configured for a given List, then the On Air color and ON AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as On Air according to the Tally configuration. And the On Line color and ON LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as On Line according to the Tally configuration. (See section on Tally for more info.) Will save all desktop settings, including which windows are open and how they are tiled in proportion to one another. This will determine which windows will be opened automatically each time the program is launched. Allows changing the current password Tools Menu Option Recycle Bin Play List Translator Video Window Description A play list view of prior events that have been cut or deleted. This option is not implemented. It is listed here for consistency and to address the grayed out text in the menu. This option is not yet implemented. Window Menu 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 26 of 288

27 Air Client Overview Option Default Desktop Cascade Tile Arrange Icons Close All Active Windows Description Changes desktop appearance back to the saved desktop settings Cascades all open windows [screens] so that title-bar lines will be visible Allow viewing all open windows [screens] simultaneously in a tile view Allows you to arrange icons on your desktop Closes all open windows [or screens]. Does not close the program All open windows will be listed on bottom of this menu for easy access. Active window [screen] will have a check next to its title View Menu This menu allows the user to set which toolbar configuration to show on the desktop. Option Description Standard 32 x 32 Displays standard operations toolbar (32 x 32). List Tools 32 x 32 Displays List Tools toolbar. Global Tools 32 x 32 Displays Global Tools toolbar. Standard 20 x 20 Displays standard operations toolbar (20 x 20). Help Menu Option Description 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 27 of 288

28 Air Client Overview Option Help About Description Launches the Air Client Help System. Launches a dialog that presents information about the current version of Air Client software. Playlist Right-Click Menu This menu is available by right clicking on an open playlist window. Option Zoom Window Hide All Secondaries/Show All Secondaries Hide Some Secondary Type Description The Zoom Window option will show a view of the currently running event, the next event to run, and the next missing event on the transmission list. To show all secondary events in a play list, click Show All Secondaries. When secondary events are not currently hidden, the options available will be Hide All Secondaries. To hide the selected secondaries use the "Select Secondaries To Hide" option, and then use this option Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 28 of 288

29 Air Client Overview Option Select Secondaries Expand / Contract an Event Append List Load List Insert List Control Panel Device Control Panel Show More Info Thread Unthread ReCue Preview Play Description To Hide To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide. Allows show or hide of a Secondary event on a one-at-a-time basis, by selecting the primary event and clicking Exp/Contract. The Append List option allows a play list file to be appended to the end of the currently selected transmission list. This will Load a play list file over the currently playing a selected transmission list. Caution: This will take the transmission list off the air if this is used while the transmission list is running. This will insert a play list file above the placement of the cursor on the transmission list. This can be used for schedule or program changes. Select the Control Panel to bring up the On Air Software Control Panel. This control panel gives the operator direct control of devices that are currently playing on air. This control panel also allows the transmission list to be threaded/loaded for On Air playback in the event the transmission list is not currently playing. This can also be accessed by double-clicking the active transmission list. When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VTR, a Device Control Panel for threaded VTR can be accessed to allow remote control of the VTR. This can also be accessed by double-clicking on a devicespecific line item in the transmission list or Device Status window. This option if configured will allow more info (database metadata) to be shown about a selected event. This info is input at the Media Client. This is used to force thread on an individual selected event on the list if the device is available and/or the event was unthreaded previously. A threaded event can be unthreaded. This is done to eject a tape, or to allow editing of a threaded event. Be advised that when Unthread is used the Transmission List will go to an unthreaded state and will need to be re-threaded by hitting Program Run on the LCP-20 or the Control Panel option. Caution: The Unthread button on the hardware control panel unthreads the entire playlist, and is NOT the same as this rightclick menu Unthread. Can be used to recue a selected cued event on the transmission list if the Start of Message has changed, or is currently in Play mode. Caution: Do not confuse this menu option with RECUE on the hardware panel which recues the on-air playing event. If an event is cued but not needed for immediate playback On Air 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 29 of 288

30 Air Client Overview Option Clear Done Events Toggle Look Ahead On Air Focus Air Protect Barcode Event Compiler Options Defaults Columns Fonts Colors Description the Preview Play option can be used to preview the material. The event will play it's duration and then recue when finished. An event that is marked done can be dragged and dropped down the transmission list and then re-activated so it can play on the list again. The Look Ahead is the area of the transmission list that will query the devices assigned to the transmission list for availability of media in the look ahead area. The toggle look ahead option will adjust the look ahead area from the current setting to a full list look ahead. If the look ahead is set to the full list, then it will adjust to the pre-configured look ahead value. When viewing events further down a transmission list this option will enable the focus of the list to jump back to the On Air event when a new event plays. If there is a problem with the On Air event device a backup "protect" device (if configured) can be selected for individual selected events further down the transmission list within the lookahead. Caution: Do not confuse this menu option with the AIR PROTECT button on the hardware panel which will Air Protect the current on-air event. An external VTR (if configured) can be used for On Air playback using the Barcode Event option. Once the tape is loaded this option will activate the event on the play list. Select this option by placing your cursor on the line for the missing event, then rightclicking and choosing Barcode Event prior to putting the VTR in remote or prior to loading the needed tape into the VTR that is already in remote. This option allows the creation of a compiled spot reel. This spot reel can be used as an On Air spot backup tape. Certain Play List options can be configured locally at the Air Client. This option allows changing the default duration value for not found (not in DB) inserted items on the list from the factory default of 00:00:30.00 to any value you wish Configuration of the columns for the currently selected list. Configuration of the fonts. for the currently selected list. Configuration of the colors. for the currently selected list. Toolbar The View menu displays a list of created toolbars. The user can check them to have it in Air Client GUI. If the System Configuration rights to change view option was previously 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 30 of 288

31 Air Client Overview checked, only an administrator login is authorized to check or uncheck the toolbars from the View menu. This toolbar provides shortcuts to standard Air Client Operations. Icon Description New Playlist. Opens a blank playlist window. Open a Playlist. This option is used to open a playlist file for editing before appending or loading it to an active transmission list. It requires the operator first specify a list in the Open Playlist dialog. View List. Opens the transmission list window to allow for viewing of the selected active transmission list. Requires the operator to select a list from the Choose List dialog box. Device Status Window. Launches a Device Status Window. The current status of devices can be viewed for the main device server or a specific device server in a multi server environment. Device Storage window. Launches the Device Storage window for a selected device. Requires the operator first select a device from the Choose Device dialog. Media from a storage window can be copied, or dragged to a play list file or a transmission window. Switcher Control Panel. If a Switcher or router is present, launches a control panel for the switcher. Any switcher or router that is connected to the device server can be remotely selected and controlled with a control panel. Append List. Appends a list selected from an Append Playlist dialog to the end of the currently selected transmission list window. Insert List. Inserts a list selected from an Insert Playlist dialog into a current list starting at a selected event position. Search. Launches a search dialog for finding an ID. Show more Info Insert Secondary: Used to insert a secondary event into the List. Requires the operator first select a secondary event from the Secondary Events dialog. Calculate Durations: Provides a summary of total duration for the selected (block highlighted) block of events. (This icon becomes active when an event is selected on a Playlist.) Pull List. Launches the Pull List window. This allows the operator to get a listing of missing media from the active transmission list throughout the list even beyond the lookahead value. Requires the operator first select an order (Chronological, ID, or Box ID) from the Order dialog Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 31 of 288

32 Air Client Overview Icon Description On Air focus: Used to ensure the currently playing event in a play list is always visible in the play list window. Control Panel: Launches the Control panel dialog for controlling transmission list playout. Zoom window: Launches the Zoom window. Revise: Toggles in and out of revise mode. Database: Opens the database window for robust database search operations. Display Errors: Launches the Error Log window. Recycle Bin: Opens the recycle bin. Default Desktop: Loads back your default desktop so that all lists and windows are displayed as set in the save desktop option. Puts windows back into their default layout. Sliding Toolbars When selected, the toolbars can slide along the panel. Only an administrator login is authorized to do sliding of the toolbars. (i.e. This permission is enable by checking the option: System Configuration rights to change view control only.) To save the new position of those toolbars, from the main menu select Properties > Save desktop. Control Panels There are two panel types that can be used to play a Transmission list: a hardware control panel and a software control panel. Hardware Control Panels Hardware Control Panel can be used to play a Transmission list. There are two panels supported by ADC: the older LCP-20 panel and the newer Operator Control Panel (OCP) 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 32 of 288

33 Air Client Overview LCP-20 panel Playout operations can be controlled with the help of the LCP-20 hardware control panel that provides comfortable and immediate action. Operator Control Panel (OCP) The Operator Control Pane is a mid-sized desktop controller that provides instant audio or video playback and control for broadcast automation, post production and other applications. This panel gives operators a choice in controlling automation environments by providing unambiguous button control in addition to conventional keyboard and mouse operations. Note: Actions taken on the OCP are logged in the Operations log. Panel Functions The OCP comes with 24, hi-res, remotely-relegendable 64 x 32 LCD buttons, 10 bank buttons, and 17 additional function and navigation switches. The hi-res LCD buttons can display text (up to 40 characters) and graphics using built in command driven serial interfaces. They integrate a graphical LCD with RGB backlighting, and are capable of displaying up to 64 colors. Software controls the interface, display and backlighting. Data only needs to be transmitted when a change is made to the display or background colors. These LCD buttons can be programmed to provide a range of functions. Most commonly used when breakdowns or other failures occur, each button on the OCP can call up actions needed in a hurry. For example, a button can be configured to: Cut back to Network, or even backup device with a ready content. Display a full-screen apology slide or trigger a caption for missing audio Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 33 of 288

34 Air Client Overview Software Control Panel The Software Control Panel is used to play a Transmission list. Double clicking on the play list brings up the software version of the On Air Play list control panel. Software Panel buttons Run: Thread and cues the first event in a playlist and any events within the time range specified in the lookahead. The number of events cued is limited by the number of available media heads and devices. You cannot play events until you run the playlist. Play: Plays the first event in a playlist; however, before you can play events, you must first click the Run button. The Play button can also be used to restart a frozen or held playlist or a playlist stopped by a break event. Clicking the Play button initiates preroll for the playlist so the following event will play after the preroll time. The Play button will not play a hard start event unless it is configured to do so, as described in Miscellaneous on page Use the Play Hard Hits option to start a hard start event with the Play button on the control panel. If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist has stopped running. Ready: Turn on tension to the next VTR event in tension release to prepare upcoming VTR events. Click this button to prepare a VTR event for transmission that is out of the standby on-time range. Usually used after an upcount events to get the next event ready Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 34 of 288

35 Air Client Overview Hold: Holds the countdown of an event that is playing, causing the event to continue playing longer than its duration. You can extend the event s duration until the Play button is clicked. The playlist will then advance to the next event which can only be played with the Play or Skip button. Skip: Skips the event currently playing and plays the next event. Also, click this button to skip a frozen or held event. Ten Rel: (Tension Release) Places a cued event s VTR into tension release. At the Standby On time (before an event is about to air), Air Client issues a command to the VTR to enter Ready status and tension up the tape. The Status field of the event in a transmission list window displays Ready. Freeze: Stops play and countdown. Click this button to pause the current event. Then, you may skip, roll, reinitiate play or recue the event using the Play button. The Status field of the event in a transmission list window displays Still. Roll: Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button plays the event. UnThd: (UnThread). Stops a running transmission list, including the on-air event and any events that follow. All events are uncued and the list goes off the air. Protect: Toggles the signal switching paths between the on-air and protect devices. Click this button to play an event from the air device, or vice versa. This is an optional function and may not be available on your workstation. +1 Sec: Add one second to the playing event s duration. Each time you click this button, one second is added to the duration. Recue: Recues an on-air event. To play the recued event, click the Play button. -1 Sec: Subtract one second from the playing event s duration. Each time you click this button, one second is subtracted from the duration. Blank buttons are not visible by default, but can be assigned. For more information see section: Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties. Panel Color Configuration The Software Control Panel of each Transmission List can be configured with: A specific color The possibility to enable / disable the Control Panel functions. Example for a transmission list with only some functions enabled. Example of a preview/utility List with all functions enabled Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 35 of 288

36 Air Client Overview Transmission List Window A transmission list is a play list loaded in a transmission list window. A transmission list window looks almost identical to a play list window except, in a transmission list window, you can edit and broadcast a transmission list. Air Client supports list windows of four types: play lists, compile lists, GMT lists and media lists. Note: Due to the customizable nature of the Air Client product, a station s columns may appear different than shown in the following example window. Air Focus/List Locked This entry on the list status bar shows if On Air Focus is turned ON or OFF. To the right is an indicator to notify user if the list is "locked" which means the list is in Revise (Done=0) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 36 of 288

37 Air Client Overview Event Types Most Common Playback Event Types A (Automatic Event): It will thread, play event for duration listed and switch. An event with an A by itself will play out its duration and roll into the next event U (AU): Upcounter/Unknown Duration this event type is used for air events of an unknown duration; such as network, news or sports events O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute, this event will play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field **Caution: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback N (AN/AUN): Time to Next will provide a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded events until the next N is seen in the list mostly used for countback to live news segments D (AOD): Deadroll allows you to deadroll a taped show at its intended time further down the list to join-in-progress later Other Event Types: R (Record Event): This event type will only be found on a Record List. A Record event starts at the time indicated in the time field and records for the duration indicated P (Play): This is an event that will simply play without threading or switching S (Switch): This is an event that will simply cause a switch to occur T (Thread): This is an event that will simply cause a device to cue Program Delay Event: A Program "delay" event allows a single-file-multi-segment event to continue to roll under a break and join in progress after the break without re-cueing. A Delay event allows the automation to play material from a video server port while it is still being recorded. However, unlike a typical playout event for video servers, it is handled more like a live event. The user cues a break to run on a SECOND video server playout port. The LCP panel is used to roll the break when required. Unlike typical video server playout behavior, for the Delay event, the video file server playout that is delayed continues to roll under the break that is rolled by the user. When the break is over, the list returns to the video server delayed programming and picks up right where the file is still playing. This behavior modifies the server playout to behave much like delaying with a VTR. Event Data Fields Most of a transmission list window s fields are identical to a playlist window s fields. Following is a description of each event data field column unique to a transmission list window: Device: The name of the device assigned to an event. For a switch-only event, the device is SWTCH. Status: The status of a device, such as playing, cued or threaded. Protect: The name of the protect device assigned to an event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 37 of 288

38 Air Client Overview PStatus: Identifies the Air/Protect status, or the play source, of an event. Bin: Displays the location of a tape in a cart machine. Playlist Window Playlist windows are used to create and edit playlists. Event Data Fields A playlist window lists events vertically and the event data fields are listed horizontally and grouped in columns. A description of each event data field column follows: Event: This is the number, or position, of the event in the playlist. The number is automatically generated by Air Client. Time: The time primary events are scheduled to play, or offsets for secondary events. Time is entered in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames. For primary events, a value is entered when the event uses a hard start. For secondary events, a value is entered to indicate the offsets from the start time of the associated primary event. Sec: This uneditable column displays codes that represent effect types or special secondary events. The codes are: sav: Secondary Audio/Video bav: Back Timed A/V sgpi: GPI Contact bgpi: Secondary Back Timed GPI skey: Keyer On/Off stky: Transition Key saov: Audio Over On/Off stao: Transition Audio Over Break: Break event; no symbol is displayed. sdat: Data sbar: Barter Spot srsw: Record Switcher ssrc: Switcher Crosspoint srec: Secondary Record ssyn: Break Sync ssys: Secondary System vdt: Secondary A/V Event with Data sdat: Secondary Data Event with Data 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 38 of 288

39 Air Client Overview Comment: Operator comments. cmid: Compile ID bsys: Back Timed System AUD-XPT: Switcher Audio Crosspoint Type: One or more event types can be entered for each event. In the playlist, enter the symbol for the primary event types. The event type controls how the automation system will execute that event. The event type, A, is the default when an event is inserted, which is a play, thread and switch event; however, you can play an event without switching or threading, or you can just have an event switch without threading or playing by changing the type value. ID: The ID of the event which uniquely identifies a piece of material or action for the event. The maximum length of an ID is determined by the configuration of the Air Client workstation. Seg: The segment number of the event, ranging from 1 to 99, if the material has multiple segments. Title: The title of the event. The maximum length of a title is determined by the configuration of the Air Client workstation. Dur: The duration of the event. Duration is entered in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames. Ch.: The channel, or switching path, an event plays or records on. The values are A, B, C or D. The default is A. When the Ch field is blank, the channel is A. SOM: The start of material for an event. This is the timecode location of the first frame of video to be seen on-air for an event. Use the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames. E: Displays the transition effect type for an event. S: Displays the transition effect speed for an event. Values are S for slow, M for medium and F for fast. Qual: (Qualifiers) Air Client: This field is used to display the Qualifiers for secondary keyer events. The field indicates the enabled Modifier (Normal, Shadow, Drop Shadow, Border) and then the enabled Source (Self, External, Chroma). For example: If in the Key Event configuration the Modifier: Shadow is enabled and the Source: Chroma is enabled, then the field will display SC. The Qualifier LOSE appears on a PRIMARY event, when the End Key Hold is checked. All keyers in HOLD mode, will be turned OFF. For the IconMaster Master Control Switcher only: All keyers in HOLD mode, are turned OFF when the keyer number is 0. If the keyer number is not zero, but a number 1 to 254, then only that specific keyer number is turned off. Media Client: Displays the video quality of a spot or program. The specific quality grades indicated in this field are OK, Marginal or Do Not Air. A, B, C or D quality are arbitrary grades to which the user may assign values. For example, A may represent to-air quality and D may represent draft quality. This field is for reference only and does not affect the automation system. #: Displays the source input number used in Keyer or Audio Over secondary events. %: Displays the audio over ratio value as a percentage and is used for audio over events only Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 39 of 288

40 Air Client Overview Compile ID: Displays the ID of the tape whose media has been compiled onto a compile reel. Compile SOM: Displays the SOM of the compile ID on the compile reel. ABOX. The primary box ID of a multispot or Odetics tape. ABOXSOM: The SOM of a spot on the ABOX. BBOX: The backup box ID of a tape containing BSPOT (multispot) material IDs. BBOXSOM: The SOM of a spot on the BBOX. ssp: The secondary switching parameter contains values depending on the event type. For primary and secondary Audio/Video events, the value is the audio modes, mono and stereo. By default, the audio mode is stereo. The value is initially set in a media prep product, such as Media Client, for the Audio Format database field. It can be modified in Air Client by clicking an event and entering S or M in the ssp field in Revise mode (ALT + R). For secondary key and secondary audio over events, the value ranges from 1 to 9. The number corresponds to a keyer or mixer channel number on the master control switcher. MONO: When mono is set on the playlist ssp column, it will send this command to the switcher, if the switcher is pre-configured for a mono setting it will switch the audio to mono. Unique Event Data Fields The following playlist columns are unique to a transmission window. Device: The name of the device assigned to an event. For a switch-only event, the device is SWTCH. Status: The status of a device, such as playing, cued or threaded. Protect: The name of the protect device assigned to an event. This is an option for the Automation system. PStatus: Identifies the Air/Protect status. The PStatus should mirror the Status to ensure protect device is ready in case of an on air emergency. Bin: Displays the location of a tape in a cart machine Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 40 of 288

41 Getting Started Getting Started To Launch Air Client 1. From the desktop double click on the Air Client Icon. The Login dialog is displayed. 2. Enter Admin, <no password> 3. Click OK, or press [Enter] To Stop Air Client Logout and In-Session Authentication End Air Client sessions by clicking Change User on the File menu, then clicking the Logout button. If a system administrator has setup multiple users to use the Air Client workstation, other users can login from the Change User dialog box. Air Client User Authentication When Air Client is launched, enter your username and password in the User Name: and User Password: fields in the Login dialog box. Usernames and passwords are created by the system administrator using the Windows Security Administration Tool. Admin is not assigned a password because it is commonly used in broadcast facilities as the access name for multiple users. To prevent unauthorized access to the Air Client workstation, a system administrator should assign an administrator password for this account. Note: If the username field contains the username Default, the privileges assigned to the Default account are used. At facilities where the security administration tool is used, this 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 41 of 288

42 Getting Started account may be configured to limit access to certain Air Client functions. The original settings for Default include no privileges. Some Air Client features, such as configuration options for transmission list windows, will not be available to all users if security is used. Assigning an Administrator Password Use the following procedure to assign a new password to the Admin username. 1. From the Air Client main menu select Properties > Set Password... The Set Admin Password dialog is displayed. 2. In the Set Admin Password dialog box, perform the following tasks: Current Password: Enter your password in the field. New Password: Enter a new password In the field. Confirm Password: Verify your new password by entering it in the field. If the password you entered in the New Password: and Confirm Password: fields do not match, reenter them. Note: At installation the default Login is Admin, <no password>. Managing Server Connections Multi-Server Note: In a multi server environment, up to 25 Device Servers can be configured as available in ADC, but only up to 12 can be connected to at one time. IMPORTANT Multi-Server Logon Note: With multiple server login the backup server name is not needed to be on the shortcut command line. Connecting to a Server To connect to a server available to Air Client, 1. From the Air Client main menu select Servers > Connect... The Connect to server dialog box is displayed listing the servers Air Client can connect to Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 42 of 288

43 Getting Started 2. In the Connect to server dialog box, select a server from the Available Servers: pane and then click OK. 3. To connect to another server, repeat Step 2. The Air Client can connect to a maximum number of eight (8) servers. Disconnecting from a Server To remove access to transmission lists and device storage and device status windows on a server connected to Air Client, disconnect from a server by clicking the server, then clicking Disconnect... on the Servers menu. Traffic-Generated Lists Events entered in a traffic system by the traffic department are stored in an external file which can be translated into a playlist. Translating and importing this file, versus entering each event manually, avoids redundant data entry, saves time and allows the traffic department file to be edited by an Air Client operator. Use the WinCmms to translate a log from traffic into a.lst file. For information on this application see WinCmms. To Save the Desktop Use the following procedure to save all desktop settings, including which windows are open and how they are tiled in proportion to one another. This will determine which windows will be opened automatically each time the program is launched. From the Air Client main menu select Properties > Save Desktop Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 43 of 288

44 Getting Started Keyboard Shortcuts It is possible to access certain commands through Keyboard Shortcut Keys. Memorizing these shortcuts may save time in the future. The shortcut keys are displayed next to their corresponding function within the pull-down or pop-up menus. A list of shortcut commands Menu File Menu Edit menu Events Menu Toolbar Commands Playlist Options Menu Others / Misc. Shortcut(s) Ctrl+N = New Playlist Ctrl+O = Open Playlist Ctrl+S = Save Ctrl+P = Print Alt+X = Exit Program (Note: Alt+F4 is the Windows shortcut for closing an application.) Ctrl+X = Cut Ctrl+C= Copy Ctrl+V= Paste CTRL+F= Find CTRL+R= Replace DEL = Clear / Delete Alt+R = Toggle Revise Alt+Q = Revise INS = Insert New Primary Shift+INS = Insert Secondary Alt+O = Toggle Hard Start Alt+M = Ripple Time Alt+Hyphen/Alt+Spacebar =window sizing pull-down Shift+F5 = Cascade Shift+F4 = Tile Ctrl+Tab = Select a window s alternate entry field Ctrl+F6 = Display next open window Ctrl+F4 = Close active window Shift+F10 = Display a window s Right Click Menu Ctrl+H = Hide All Secondaries Ctrl+T = Hide Some Secondary Event Types Ctrl+E = Expand/Contract an event Alt+V = Device Control Panel Alt+C = Cue a selected event Alt+T = Thread a selected event Alt+U = Unthread selected event F1 = Help 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 44 of 288

45 Getting Started Menu Shortcut(s) Ctrl+Home = Top of List Ctrl+End = End of List 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 45 of 288

46 On-Air Playback Operations On-Air Playback Operations About On-Air Playback This section describes how to quickly start using the Air Client application. Detailed use of the features of the Air Client application will be described later in the following chapters of this manual. The Air Client application allows real-time monitoring and control of the on-air playout channel. Play List files generated by a traffic department may be translated by the automation play list translator utility and then appended into the transmission list. Play list files may also be created manually with the Air Client software. The transmission list controls the actual sequence of playout events. Events may be cut, copied, pasted, dragged and dropped within the transmission list. New play list files may be appended to the current onair transmission list to form a single, continuous playout list. As the transmission list plays events, the list packs - DONE events will disappear from the top of the list, and new events will enter the event lookahead. When events enter the lookahead, their IDs are compared to IDs within the storage collection of the video server or to a VTR assigned to the transmission list. If the ID is found in the video server or a VTR, the event is registered and will turn blue on the transmission list. A registered event is available for playout. Missing events IDs not found in an assigned device will appear in red on the transmission list to alert the operator that they must be readied for air. Events outside the event lookahead are not registered. The transmission list will always display a configurable amount of DONE events at the top. The transmission list actually runs on the Device Server, under the control of the Air Client. In case of a failure of the Air Client, the transmission list will continue to run on the Device Server, preventing an interruption of the playout channel. Both the Air Client and Media Client applications may be safely restarted at any time. The Air Client may be safely rebooted without affecting air. To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List Use the following procedure to quickly view an ON AIR List / Transmission List. Note: The Operation Control Panel (OCP) play list buttons can also be used to view an ON AIR List. Actions taken on the OCP are logged in the Operations log. 1. From the main toolbar select the VIEW LIST Icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 46 of 288

47 On-Air Playback Operations 2. Choose the desired List, and then click OK. Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here. 3. The selected Transmission List opens in the Air Client desktop. Note: Loading a List overwrites any events that are currently in the transmission list with the play list file that is selected. This will stop an event that is currently playing On Air. This is intended to be used for Record Lists or when the transmission list is already off the air. To Build a Play List File 1. From the main menu select File > New play list... OR from the toolbar select the New Playlist icon ( ). A new blank Playlist window is opened in the workspace Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 47 of 288

48 On-Air Playback Operations 2. Select Insert key on keyboard OR from the main menu select Events> Insert Primary. The application is automatically placed in Revise Mode and a new event appears in the Playlist window. 3. Click on the ID column of this new event and then enter the ID of a program that was prepared using Media Client. 4. Press <Alt + R> on keyboard to get out of Revise Mode. The segment select box appears. 5. Select segment 1 in the segment box and then click OK. 6. Position yellow cursor on the play list and repeat steps 3-5 for additional segments and/or spots. Any new events will be inserted above the cursor. When inserting of events are completed, press <Alt+R> to get out of Revise Mode. 7. From the main menu select File > Save PlayList As. The Save Playlist dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 48 of 288

49 On-Air Playback Operations 8. File Name: Type the name the Play List is to be saved as, and then select Save. The play list filename will appear at the top of the window. Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters. 9. Close the Play List window. To Save a Playlist file as Text 1. Select a playlist file or the On Air transmission list 2. From the main menu select File > Save As Text. The Save as Text dialog is displayed. 3. File Name: Enter the file name or select existing file form list options, and then select Save. Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 49 of 288

50 On-Air Playback Operations To Open an Existing Playlist 1. From the main menu select File > Open Play List OR on the toolbar select the Open play list icon ( ). 2. Select the play list file you wish to open and view. The default playlist file directory is the same directory where the Air Client application resides. From the Open/Save dialog box, select a playlist and click Open. Playlist filenames use a.lst extension. Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters. 3. Once the playlist file is open, the file can be checked for accuracy, changes can be made, etc. Your Play List name may be different than what appears here. To Insert a Play List file to the Transmission List Use this procedure to insert a play list file above the placement of the cursor on the transmission list. This can be used for schedule or program changes. 1. Select the View Play List icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 50 of 288

51 On-Air Playback Operations 2. Choose the desired List (PlayList1), and then click OK. This brings up the Transmission List that will be used for On Air Playback. Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here. 3. Select the event line where the playlist will be inserted. Position the cursor on the transmission list at the specific point where the play list will be inserted. IMPORTANT: The playlist is inserted ABOVE the selected line. 4. Select Insert List icon ( ). The Insert PlayList dialog is displayed. 5. On the Insert PlayList dialog, select the Play List file that will be inserted to the On Air Play List window an then select Open. The selected play list is inserted above the selected line. The filename of the inserted play list appears above the newly inserted play list. Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 51 of 288

52 On-Air Playback Operations To Append a Play List file to the Transmission List About ADC v11 vs. ADC v12 List Incompatibility: Operators are prevented from loading ADC v12 formatted lists to ADC v11 systems. Upon load / append, list formats are validated to detect and prevent ADC Device Server v12 formatted lists from being loaded into an ADC Device Server v11. If a list mismatch is detected, an error message is presented that informs the user that the list load / append action is not supported. Example Error message text: The requested action is not supported due to playlist format incompatibly. Please check that the correct playlist has been selected and re-try the playlist action. If this error message reappears, the selected playlist may need to be converted to the correct format. If you see this message, contact Automation Support for assistance. 1. Select the View Play List icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed. 2. Choose the desired List (PlayList1), and then click OK. This brings up the Transmission List that will be used for On Air Playback. Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here. 3. Select Append List icon ( ). The Append PlayList dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 52 of 288

53 On-Air Playback Operations Caution: You can also right click in the transmission list to open the Play List Options menu and select Append List. Do this with care. Load List is located next to Append List on the right click transmission list options menu. If Load List is selected the On Air Transmission List will be taken off the air! 4. On the Append PlayList dialog, select the Play List file that will be appended to the On Air Play List window an then select Open. Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters. 5. The selected play list will be appended to the window. 6. When the filename marks done at the top of the transmission list, the bottom of the transmission list will update with the currently running play list. (Example below is a representation only of the what it will look like) The events should be blue except for the program, which will be red and loaded into a tape deck or still needs to be recorded to the disk. Below is an example of how events appear in the window when not running Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 53 of 288

54 On-Air Playback Operations To generate a MisMatch List A mismatch list can be generated to show mismatches in Title and Duration between events an appended list and the ADC database. 1. Configure the following Environment parameters to enable generation of a mismatch list. (For more information see section: Configuring System Properties > Environment Properties.) From the main menu select Properties> Environment. This opens the Environment Options dialog. Select the System Directories tab. On this tab specify system directory path for Mismatched Files. Select the List Options tab. On this tab enable (check) either or both of the following parameters: Title Mismatch. A title mismatch occurs when the value of an event s title field does not match the event s record in the database. To create a title mismatch file, click the Title Mismatch button. A title mismatch file is a list of IDs whose titles in the playlist differ from those in the database. Duration Mismatch. When checked, the system will create a Duration Mismatch file listing events that have a duration that does not match the ID s duration in the database within the specified number of frames in the Max. Frame Difference field. 2. Append a Play List file to the Transmission List. The system checks the appended entries against the ADC database. If a mismatch in Title and/or Duration is identified, a mismatch file is generated (for that date and time) listing each identified entry. A window pops up displaying the mismatch list. The operator can use this list as a reference to correct the mismatches Appending another list will overwrite any pervious list. Example Mismatch List 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 54 of 288

55 On-Air Playback Operations To Load a List This operation will overwrite any events that are currently in the transmission list with the play list file that is selected. This is intended to be used for Record Lists or when the transmission list is already off the air. WARNING: If Load List is selected, the On Air Transmission List will be taken off the air! Right click in the transmission list to open the Play List Options menu, and then select Load List. Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters. About ADC v11 vs. ADC v12 List Incompatibility: Operators are prevented from loading ADC v12 formatted lists to ADC v11 systems. Upon load / append, list formats are validated to detect and prevent ADC Device Server v12 formatted lists from being loaded into an ADC Device Server v11. If a list mismatch is detected, an error message is presented that informs the user that the list load / append action is not supported. Example Error message text: The requested action is not supported due to playlist format incompatibly. Please check that the correct playlist has been selected and re-try the playlist action. If this error message reappears, the selected playlist may need to be converted to the correct format. If you see this message, contact Automation Support for assistance. To Run the Transmission List With a playlist loaded: 1. Select Run on the optional Hardware Control Panel (LCP-20 or OCP) OR Double click on the play list to bring up the software version of the On Air Play list control panel and select Run Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 55 of 288

56 On-Air Playback Operations Selecting Run threads up all available devices that have the IDs located in the device. Typically only the disk is able to thread and any Switch-Only sources such as Studio or Network sources. Software Panel buttons: Run: Thread and cues the first event in a playlist and any events within the time range specified in the lookahead. The number of events cued is limited by the number of available media heads and devices. You cannot play events until you run the playlist. Play: Plays the first event in a playlist; however, before you can play events, you must first click the Run button. The Play button can also be used to restart a frozen or held playlist or a playlist stopped by a break event. Clicking the Play button initiates preroll for the playlist so the following event will play after the preroll time. The Play button will not play a hard start event unless it is configured to do so, as described in Miscellaneous on page Use the Play Hard Hits option to start a hard start event with the Play button on the control panel. If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist has stopped running. Ready: Turn on tension to the next VTR event in tension release to prepare upcoming VTR events. Click this button to prepare a VTR event for transmission that is out of the standby on-time range. Usually used after an upcount events to get the next event ready. Hold: Holds the countdown of an event that is playing, causing the event to continue playing longer than its duration. You can extend the event s duration until the Play button is clicked. The playlist will then advance to the next event which can only be played with the Play or Skip button. Skip: Skips the event currently playing and plays the next event. Also, click this button to skip a frozen or held event. Ten Rel: (Tension Release) Places a cued event s VTR into tension release. At the Standby On time (before an event is about to air), Air Client issues a command to the VTR to enter Ready status and tension up the tape. The Status field of the event in a transmission list window displays Ready. Freeze: Stops play and countdown. Click this button to pause the current event. Then, you may skip, roll, reinitiate play or recue the event using the Play button. The Status field of the event in a transmission list window displays Still. Roll: Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button plays the event. UnThd: (UnThread). Stops a running transmission list, including the on-air event and any events that follow. All events are uncued and the list goes off-air Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 56 of 288

57 On-Air Playback Operations Protect: Toggles the signal switching paths between the on-air and protect devices. Click this button to play an event from the air device, or vice versa. This is an optional function and may not be available on your workstation. +1 Sec: Add one second to the playing event s duration. Each time you click this button, one second is added to the duration. Recue: Recues an on-air event. To play the recued event, click the Play button. -1 Sec: Subtract one second from the playing event s duration. Each time you click this button, one second is subtracted from the duration. 2. (Option) If loading a tape that does not have User Bits into a VTR follow these steps: Insert tape into an available On Air VTR deck that is in Local mode. Set levels. Select event on play list that represents loaded tape in VTR, right click and from the popup menu select Barcode Event. Put VTR into Remote. Event on the play list will turn blue, the VTR will cue to SOM in the SOM column, and device column will reflect the VTR tape is loaded into. 3. The Play list is now loaded and cued up. From the tool bar select the Control Panel icon ( ). 4. Select Play on the Control Panel. The play list starts playing. If the system is configured correctly, the switcher switches these events to the program output of the switcher. Each event plays for the duration designated on play list. To Air a Live Event Live shows can air using a switch-only device that was configured as a source on the switcher. The switch-only device and its audio/video cross points are configured in the device server. Once you know for sure you will want to air a live show: 1. Insert a Primary Event into the transmission list at the time a live event is to air. (Note If the log was translated from traffic, the event type should be on the list already.) 2. Enter the ID name of the switch-only. Note: The event may already be in the playlist. Type AU for the event type. The duration can be set to 00:00:00:00 for event to count up from the start, or the estimated duration for the live event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 57 of 288

58 On-Air Playback Operations Important Note on switch-only events with IconMaster AuxBus: Under certain circumstances using automation with back-to-back, single-headed switch-only events, the Iconmaster AuxBus can fail to switch properly. A simple alternative solution is to configure a two-headed switch-only device in situations where back-to-back switch-only primaries are accompanied by Switcher Crosspoint (sxp) events. 3. Press <Alt+R> to exit Revise Mode. The switch-only will play at the designated time if an O is also entered for the live show s first segment only. If an O is not used then the live show will air in the order it is entered in the On Air Play List. Check the Device Status Window to see what the proper ID name is for a configured switch-only. The configured switch-only will be assigned to the On Air Play List. Use the ID that is in the ID column of the correct switch-only to use. 4. When each live event plays, the operator will need to manually roll out of a live event on the On Air Play List. Select the Play button on the hardware or software control panel to roll out of the live event to the break. 5. The events that run during a break will run as A event types (above the blank event types). The break will play in sequence until the next AU live source is played, at which time the operator would once again need to manually play out of the live event. Join an Event in Progress If required you can Join-an-Event in Progress in either of two ways: To Join a Server-Based Event in Progress To Join a Tape-Based Event in Progress 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 58 of 288

59 On-Air Playback Operations To Join a Server-Based Event in Progress 1. The List below shows that we are in the last two segments of a Basketball game that is running LONG. The event on line 11 is supposed to have started at 19:30 2. Remove any hard starts (AOs) so they do not dump you out of your game early. 3. As the game goes long, open the original list file in the PLAYLIST EDITOR (see right side of sample screen below). Use this to determine the original intended air times, and assist in the decision of what segments/spots have no chance of airing and would need to be deleted outright. 4. At this point, the active transmission list has now just started to roll the end break following the last live (AU) segment of the game. Very quickly, look at the Long indicator 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 59 of 288

60 On-Air Playback Operations at the bottom of the screen. Add this value to the SOM field for the segment you need to IN-Cue to JIP. 5. Place the cursor in SOM field, enter REVISE mode, arrow over and add the LONG time value to the SOM value. When finished exit Revise mode. 6. Upon successful JIP the Long/Short indicator should go blank if the list times out exactly right To Join a Tape Event in Progress Use this procedure when deadrolling of a show is required during a Live program that is running long. Once certain you need to deadroll a show, you have until the time the show is scheduled to air to have it deadroll automatically Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 60 of 288

61 On-Air Playback Operations 1. Place a Hard start with Deadroll (AOD) on the 1st tape playback event of the deadroll sequence. 2. Revise the start time to reflect the time it should have played in the case of the example above, event 12 was to begin airing at 11:24: With your cursor still on the line of the 1st deadroll event, perform a Ripple Time (Alt+M) this will update the times following the 1st event so they also will reflect the times they should have hit. 4. ONLY AFTER step 3 is completed, make several of the following program events deadrolls as well (AOD), use your judgment, it won t hurt to put extras in, they can be removed when necessary. 5. When the Live Program ends and the last "end break" runs, prepare the list to join in progress the deadrolling event. Watch the duration counting down on the last event in your end break, When event ends, you will need to transition manually (manually switch) into the remainder of the event you re joining (deadrolling event) make sure there is enough time left in the segment/spot first. 6. When it is the time to join the deadrolling event, switch to the source manually on the switcher. Make sure the switcher is in manual control. 7. The event immediately after the deadroll will need a hardstart to get the list back into automation. Place a Hard Start on the first event of your break following the deadroll event. this O is necessary to roll you into the break and get back into full automation. 8. Remove all remaining deadroll OD event types from remaining segments. *Once you know which segment you will Join-in-progress, your play list should resemble this example Note: Event type descriptions will be event type graphics. 9. Be sure to put the switcher back into automation control or manually switch to the next event and then put back into automation control. Once this next event hard starts and goes to Air the transmission list is back in full control. Check the start times on the play list to ensure correct start times for all following events. Using a Program Delay Event for Roll Under A Program "delay" event allows a single-file-multi-segment event to continue to roll under a break and join in progress after the break without re-cueing. A Delay event allows the automation to play material from a video server port while it is still being recorded. However, unlike a typical playout event for video servers, it is handled more like a live event. The user cues a break to run on a SECOND video server playout port. The LCP panel is used to roll the break when required Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 61 of 288

62 On-Air Playback Operations Unlike typical video server playout behavior, for the Delay event, the video file server playout that is delayed continues to roll under the break that is rolled by the user. When the break is over, the list returns to the video server delayed programming and picks up right where the file is still playing. This behavior modifies the server playout to behave much like delaying with a VTR. To Preview Play A threaded and cued event can be selected and previewed while the On Air event is currently playing. 1. Position the cursor on the event that is threaded and cued. 2. Right click on the transmission list, and from the popup menu select Preview Play. 3. Allow the event to play out and it will recue automatically. 4. If time does not permit the event to preview completely, select Recue in the right click options menu while the cursor is still on the preview playing event. Thread, Unthread, Recue an Event An upcoming event that is threaded in a device can be unthreaded, recued, and re-threaded if needed. Note: You are not allowed to edit or delete events that are CUED, e.g. Change duration, etc.; doing so can generate a RAN Short problem. Events must be unthreaded before they can be edited or deleted. Unthread an event 1. On the playlist window select the threaded event. 2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Unthread, or press <Alt+U>, or press the UnThd button on the control panel. Thread the event 1. On the playlist window select the unthreaded event. 2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Thread, or press <Alt+T>, or press the Program Run button on the control panel. Recue the event 1. On the playlist window select the threaded event. 2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Recue, or press <Alt+C>, or press the Recue button on the control panel Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 62 of 288

63 On-Air Playback Operations Using the VTR Device Control Panel When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VTR, a Device Control Panel for threaded VTR can be accessed to allow remote control of the VTR. 1. Position the cursor on the event that has a tape threaded in the VTR. 2. Right click on the transmission list, select Device Control Panel. (It can also be invoked by double clicking on the device in the device status window.) A VTR remote panel will appear giving the user basic control of the VTR. Device controls include: Rewind (Rew): Click to rewind the currently threaded clip. Fast Forward (Ffwd): Click to fast forward the currently threaded clip. Stop: Click to stop the action (e.g. play, rewind, fast forward) taken on the currently threaded clip. Play: Click to put the currently threaded clip into play. Cue: Click to cue the clip to event SOM, or to the head if the event SOM field is blank. If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished. If the next event to air has been unthreaded and another event selected for control, the list must manually rethreaded. It is the operator s responsibility to ensure that resources are returned to the list and properly threaded prior to the event. Get Clip: This function is not required or available for VTRs. Jog and Shuttle: Use these controls to move forward or backward in the material. 3. Click Copy SOM to apply the device's current position as the event's SOM. IMPORTANT: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 63 of 288

64 On-Air Playback Operations If configured, the Adjust Durations When SOM Changes function modifies the duration of the event based on the change in the SOM. Adjust Durations is not invoked if the initial SOM of the event is blank. No facility is provided for manually defining the EOM or Duration of the clip using the Device Control Panel. This function does not write any data to the database, nor does it update any other events in the same or other lists. It is not intended to replace the prepping of material via the Media Client. This capability is not available when the Device Control Panel is invoked from the Device Status Window. CAUTION! - If a VTR is controlled by a Device Control Panel, the event must be cued prior to playback. - If the device control panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure the tape is cued back to the SOM by selecting the CUE button on the Device Control Panel. - The device will cue to the SOM that is located in the SOM column of the event. Using the VDCP Device Control Panel When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VDCP device, such as a Video Server, a Device Control Panel for the threaded VDCP device can be accessed to allow remote control of the VDCP Device. Depending on the resources available to the list and the currently playing event, it may be possible to unthread a currently cued event and select and thread another event prior to invoking the VDCP control panel. WARNING: Extreme caution must be exercised to avoid impacting on-air events. The VDCP control panel should not be used when either head of the port to be controlled is currently being utilized on air. 1. Position the cursor on the event that has an event threaded in the VDCP device. 2. Right click on the transmission list, select Device Control Panel. (It can also be invoked by double clicking on the device in the device status window.) A VDCP remote panel will appear giving the user basic control of the VDCP device. Device controls include: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 64 of 288

65 On-Air Playback Operations Rewind (Rew): Click to rewind the currently threaded clip. Fast Forward (Ffwd): Click to fast forward the currently threaded clip. Stop: Click to stop the action (e.g. play, rewind, fast forward) taken on the currently threaded clip. Play: Click to put the currently threaded clip into play. Cue: Click to cue the clip to event SOM, or to the head if the event SOM field is blank. If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished. If the next event to air has been unthreaded and another event selected for control, the list must manually rethreaded. It is the operator s responsibility to ensure that resources are returned to the list and properly threaded prior to the event. Get Clip: Click to cue to the head of the clip, irrespective of the event SOM. For VDCP devices, if the event has an SOM, it is not possible to navigate outside of the cued portion of the clip. The Get Clip command can be used to cue and provide access to the entire clip. Note: This will also blank the event SOM. Jog and Shuttle: Use these controls to move forward or backward in the material. If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished. 3. Click Copy SOM to apply the device's current position as the event's SOM. IMPORTANT: If configured, the Adjust Durations When SOM Changes function modifies the duration of the event based on the change in the SOM. Adjust Durations is not invoked if the initial SOM of the event is blank. No facility is provided for manually defining the EOM or Duration of the clip using the Device Control Panel. This function does not write any data to the database, nor does it update any other events in the same or other lists. It is not intended to replace the prepping of material via the Media Client. This capability is not available when the Device Control Panel is invoked from the Device Status Window. CAUTION! - The VDCP Control Panel must be used with caution as it can also control Events playing from On Air Video Servers. - If the port selected for control is currently playing out a clip to air, playing an event that is CUED on the 2nd head of the port with the VDCP Control Panel stops the currently playing head. - If played for its full duration, the reviewed clip is marked DONE. - Re-cue the clip after reviewing it by clicking on the Cue button. If the clip is not re-cued before Air, it starts playing from where it was stopped by the VDCP Control Panel Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 65 of 288

66 On-Air Playback Operations To Set on Air Focus Use the following procedure to ensure the currently playing event in a play list is always visible in the play list window. Right click on a playlist and from the popup menu select On Air Focus or press the ON Air Focus icon ( ) on the toolbar. The currently playing event is highlighted in the play list. If you scroll the window until the playing event is not visible, the list will scroll back to the next event when it goes into preroll. The List Status bar indicates if On Air focus is ON or OFF, and if List is locked (Done Count = 0) or not. Calculate Durations of Multiple Events Use the following procedure to calculate the duration of multiple events. 1. Block highlight a sequence of events to calculate. (Click an event, then hold Shift and click another event to select a range.) 2. From the main menu select Events > Calculate Durations. An Information box appears giving the total duration of all highlighted/selected events. Find an ID To find an ID that is located on a playlist file or transmission list, the Find option can be used. 1. Position the cursor at the top of the list in the ID column. 2. From the main menu select Edit > Find. The Find Id box opens Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 66 of 288

67 On-Air Playback Operations 3. Specify the search parameters: Find what field: Type in the ID to find. (e.g. Demo0001) Match whole word only. Check to have search look for whole word matches. Match case: Check to have search look only for entries that match the case (Upper or Lower) for the entry specified in the Find what field. Ignore secondary event: Check to ignore secondary events in "Find" operation. (When a search in list is typically done, the result includes secondary events. If there is a secondary event with the same ID, the user may not want to find it.) Direction: Specify the search direction: Up the list or Down the list form the current cursor position. 4. Click Find Next. The cursor will jump to the first match of the ID. 5. Edit the found ID as necessary. 6. If additional IDs need to be found select Find Next. (Repeat this until all records are found) To Find the Next Occurrence of an ID in a List An operator often needs to quickly determine the next airing of a specific program within a transmission list/play list. This option allows an operator to find the next occurrence in the list of the ID on which the cursor is positioned. 1. Position the cursor on the ID or highlight the target event within the transmission list/play list. 2. Right click on the list and from the popup menu select the option Find Next Occurrence. OR press <F3> on the keyboard Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 67 of 288

68 On-Air Playback Operations 3. The cursor position jumps to the next occurrence in the list of the ID on which the cursor was originally positioned. To Set a Hard Start Event A hard start is an event type that will play an event at a predetermined time of day. (i.e. it plays at its start time instead of when the previous event finishes playing). The device must be threaded and cued for the hard start to run correctly. To Toggle a Hard Start 1. Position cursor in type field of event that will be a hardstart event. 2. Select Alt+O in the Events Menu, or get into Revise (Alt+R) and type in what event types are needed. Note: An O only designates an event to be a hard start, an A will still be required to correctly thread, play, and switch the event. 3. Position cursor in the time field of the event to hardstart. If not already in Revise, get into Revise mode (Alt+R). 4. Type in desired time of day for the hardstart to play to air. Get out of Revise Mode. Note: Remember the times will not ripple past the hardstart event until it plays. Ripple time can be used to see what time of day following events will play) If the playlist is running short in duration to the hardstart event the list will stop and wait until the hardstart event s scheduled start time. Alternately if the list is running long in duration to the hardstart event the list will cut out of any playing event and start playing the hardstart event at the scheduled start time Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 68 of 288

69 On-Air Playback Operations Toggle Look Ahead The Look Ahead is the area of the transmission list that will query the devices assigned to the transmission list for availability of media in the look ahead area. The toggle look ahead option will adjust the look ahead area from the current setting to a full list look ahead. If the look ahead is set to the full list, then it will adjust to the pre-configured look ahead value. The look ahead value is the configured value of events that the automation will check for device availability. Events within the lookahead range display in blue (or customized color as set in the playlist options menu/colors) if they are primary events and are located on an assigned device to the transmission list. Events outside of the lookahead range will display in black. If an event is within the lookahead range, but is missing media, it will display in red. Toggle look ahead for the entire list checks the entire list and has a direct impact on how GMT transfers media. To Toggle Look Ahead Right click on a playlist list window and from the popup menu select Toggle Look Ahead or press <F8> shortcut. Managing List Confirmations It is possible to configure a Confirmation for any modification of a Play List, If list confirmations are configured, the concerned parameters are displayed in a confirmation window. For details see Configuring Playlist Options. As shown in the following examples, the operator can choose to Apply the change, Find Next change, or Cancel the Confirmations. Event Time, ID, Title and Number 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 69 of 288

70 On-Air Playback Operations Event(s) Delete / Cut Examples: Event(s) or Playlist Paste / Insert Examples: Event(s) Move. Example: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 70 of 288

71 On-Air Playback Operations Managing Secondary Events on a Playlist Options for secondary events allow an operator to customize their display in the playlist. For a list of secondary events: Appendix B: Secondary Events. IMPORTANT: When secondary events are hidden, if an event or block of events are highlighted and then deleted, the hidden events within the selection are also deleted. To Show / Hide Secondary Events 1. Click the right-mouse button on the playlist s window to display the right-click menu. 2. Select the desired display option: To ensure all secondary events are shown in a playlist, click Show All Secondaries. If any secondaries are currently hidden in the list, from the right click menu select Show All Secondaries to ensure all secondary events are shown in the playlist. If any secondaries are currently shown in the list, from the right click menu select Hide All Secondaries to hide all secondary events in the playlist. Hidden secondary events are represented with icons in the Event column of the playlist. To toggle expand / contract a specific hidden secondary event on the list, select a hidden event and then from the right click menu select Explode/Implode an Event. Alternatively double click the event to toggle expand/contract Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 71 of 288

72 On-Air Playback Operations To hide a preconfigured set of secondary events, from the right click menu select Hide Some Secondary Type. See below: About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide An example of a secondary event represented with icons is shown in the following image. The icon appears in the associated event s title button. About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide. Primary Event in Play and Other Primary Events: In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine Primary event only (does not apply for preview played events), and for the Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing). Configure the Secondary events to hide : per Sec criteria (sav, sgpi, ****, ), per ID criteria (Extended Ids managed), and per Type criteria (P, T, S, A, R, ). It is possible to combine these criteria. For instance : Hide any Comment with blank type, but show any Comment with R or P type Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 72 of 288

73 On-Air Playback Operations Hide any sav (whatever the ID and Type is). Hide any sav with ID LOGO, and show all other sav. Show any skey or stranskey. The Displayed Sec. Event & Hidden Sec. Events mode allow users to hide the Secondary event per Event Type. It avoids having to configure keys if only this mode is used. The Available Hide Sec. Keys & Hide Sec. Keys mode allows users to use the keys configured in the key library through Properties > Hide Secondary Event keys function. For configuration details see Properties: Hide Secondary Event Keys. Note: Both modes can be used together but attention must be taken not to use contradictory hiding conditions. (Single-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide 1. To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide. 2. Select a Secondary event in the Displayed or Hidden area and choose arrows to move it to the opposite area. Single arrows (<, >) move individual items. Double arrows (<<, >>) will move all items. Some hidden Secondary events are transcoded for a more readable display in Custom Column of the Primary event line. 3. Click OK. When a primary event goes to air, the specified secondary event(s) assigned to the primary event are hidden. (Multi-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide for a Primary Event in Play The activation of these 2 secondary events display filtering is configurable per List (in multi-login mode). 1. To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide. 2. Select the target Primary Event (Primary Event in Play). The dialog is now active for that selection. 3. Select a Secondary event in the Displayed or Hidden area and choose arrows to move it to the opposite area. Single arrows (<, >) move individual items. Double arrows (<<, >>) will move all items. Some hidden Secondary events are transcoded for a more readable display in Custom Column of the Primary event line. 4. Click OK. When a primary event goes to air, the specified secondary event(s) assigned to the primary event are hidden Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 73 of 288

74 On-Air Playback Operations (Multi-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide for all Primary Events 1. Select the target Primary Event (Other Primary Events). The dialog is now active for that selection. 2. Select a Secondary event in the Displayed or Hidden area and choose arrows to move it to the opposite area. Single arrows (<, >) move individual items. Double arrows (<<, >>) will move all items. Some hidden Secondary events are transcoded for a more readable display in Custom Column of the Primary event line. 3. Click OK. The specified secondary event(s) assigned to all primary events in the schedule are hidden. (An icon indicates the presence of hidden secondary events.) Revising the Primary Event When Revising the corresponding field of the Primary event (in the example below: Format, Scrambling, Logo, 5+1, Pattern), a graphic edition allows user to modify the corresponding hidden Secondary event, by choosing in a list of pre-defined values. In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine Primary event only (does not apply for preview played events), and for the Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing). Using Air Protect Air Protect is an option for the Automation system. When properly configured, if a problem occurs with an event that resides on both a primary playout device and a backup "protect" device, then the air protect option could be used Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 74 of 288

75 On-Air Playback Operations To Use Air Protect To use this option when a noticeable problem is occurring with an event that is protected: 1. Click on the Air Protect button on the LCP 20 or OCP control panel, or click Protect on the Software Control Panel. 2. If the next cued item needs to be switched to the protect device instead/also, then right click on the transmission list and select Air Protect in the Play List Options menu. This causes the protect device to go to air instead of the primary device when the event plays. To Check Switcher Control This is typically used as a troubleshooting/engineering tool to check switcher control from the Air Client software. Any switcher or router that is connected to the device server can be remotely selected and controlled with a control panel. CAUTION: Special attention during the use of this feature. This panel could override what crosspoint is currently switched to Air. 1. From the toolbar select the Switcher icon ( ). The Choose Switcher dialog is displayed. 2. Select a switcher for the Switcher list and then click OK. A switcher panel for the selected device is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 75 of 288

76 On-Air Playback Operations 3. Press the Switch button on the switcher panel. This causes the selected Input to be switched to the Output setting. Reviewing Tally status information in the As Run log text file The Tally feature allows a report in the List (and corresponding Zoom window) GUI, and in its As Run log on a given Air Client station a corresponding Tally information. Example: A typical application example of this feature is a system with List Redundancy feature: E.g. For a given TV channel, the Master transmission list and the slave transmission list are playing in parallel (mirrored and synchronized). In normal situation the Master transmission list is ON AIR (= broadcasted), and the slave transmission list is ON LINE. If a problem occurs on the Master transmission list (automation or device problem), the Slave transmission list is manually switched On Air by the operator through a changeover (or another way). In that situation the previously Master list is ON LINE, and the previously Slave list is ON AIR. The change-over (or any other switching device) which allows to put 1 of the 2 redundant Transmission Lists ON AIR provides a tally signal indicating which one (Master or Slave) is On Air. On the Air Client station, the Tally signal(s) information is (are) received through one (or several) GPI board(s) by the Air client application. Tally: On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the list Tally status display in the Transmission List & Zoom window GUI The Air client can uses the Tally information of a given List to display an On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom window(s). If a Tally is configured for a given List, and if it is seen as On Air according to the Tally configuration, then the On Air color and ON AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom window, The On Line color and ON LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as On Line according to the Tally configuration. The Secondary events of the On Air / On Line Primary event (first playing event of the List), use the On Air / On Line color and status (depending of the Tally status of the List) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 76 of 288

77 On-Air Playback Operations Primary events in preview play use the On Air / On Line color (depending of the Tally status of the List), but have a PLAY status. If no Tally is configured for a given List, then the On Air color and PLAY status are used in the List and its Zoom window for playing events. On Air Transmission list & its Zoom window (On Air color and status used for playing events) : On Line Transmission list & its Zoom window ( On Line color and status used for playing events): 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 77 of 288

78 On-Air Playback Operations Log format If this option is activated on the Air Client, and for the as run log configuration of a given transmission list, the as run log text file indicates on a specific line each change in the OnAir/OnLine status (Tally information associated with a specific transmission list). The Tally information is logged in a specific line: ON-AIR DATE/TIME ID S TITLE /04/02 03:00:00.00 TALLY IS:ONAIR 10/04/02 22:30:10.00 TALLY CHANGE:ONLINE 10/04/02 22:31:00.00 TALLY CHANGE:ONAIR The corresponding line contains : the date and time of the Tally status change, the information TALLY in the ID field, the information CHANGE:ONAIR or CHANGE:ONLINE (corresponding to the new status after a change is detected) in the Title field. To avoid having to scan previous log files to know the Tally status of a given one, when the daily as run log file is created (at a configurable time of the day), the current Tally status is logged in the first line. The corresponding first line contains : the date and time of the Tally status change, the information TALLY in the ID field, the information IS:ONAIR or IS:ONLINE (As this is not corresponding to a change of the Tally status). Extended Play Mix/Wipes Early The ability to play mix/wipes early allows dissolves (mixes) or wipes to be done between the source that is currently on-air and the next source. Events that include a mix or wipe transition are required to roll several frames early to allow the events to overlap. Typical uses are to dissolve between VTRs inside an LMS, or when going from a station promo to a station ID. These promos and Station IDs always have extended vision on the videotape, i.e. the actual vision on the videotape have a longer duration, than what is shown in the Database Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 78 of 288

79 On-Air Playback Operations Configuration Note: This feature is configured in the Configuration Manager, List Options > Mix/Wip tab. For configuration details reference the ADC Device Server and Configuration Manager v11 Installation and : section Configuring List Types > Configuring Transmission List Options. When properly configured, playlist timing can be automatically maintained by playing an event with a transition for an extended duration, so that it finishes at its scheduled time, leaving the list timing unchanged. The event is played early to provide overlap for the transition, but compensates for the changed playlist time by playing the event for an extended time, which is equal to the mix or wipe transition duration. With a standard Cut transition events are played back-to-back and the list keeps its timing. However, using Extended Play there are three options: Extend Old: When configured for this option, the On-Air event is extended to provide overlap material for the transition (e.g. Dissolve or Mix). The list timing is maintained. Extend New: When configured for this option, the Next event is played early and for an extended duration. The list timing is maintained. Extend Both: When configured for this option, the On-Air event is extended by ½ the effect duration, the incoming event is played early by ½ the effect duration, and the new event is extended by ½ the effect duration. Note: Extend Both is not fully implemented as described above, because currently the playlist always plays early by the full transition duration. Example: Automatic Duration Update on the Playlist This example applies to Extend New Play Mix/Wipes, and illustrates Automatic Duration Update on the playlist from extended play mix/wipes. Before the events are CUED, the playlist looks similar to the following: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 79 of 288

80 On-Air Playback Operations Once the Events are Cued: The incoming (New) event is extended when it is CUED If an event has a MIX on it, and Extend New has been selected, the duration of the NEW event is automatically increased in the Play List by the duration of the transition. (i.e. If the duration of the event was 20 seconds and the transition (mix) has a duration of S (Slow = 60 frames = 2 seconds using NTSC), then the Play List duration for that event is automatically changed to 22 seconds. Manage the Operation Log The Air Client Operation Log tracks the operation activity within the Air Client and is recorded in binary, and text formats. The text file and the binary file are both created when the Operation Log is enabled (i.e. The option Enable operation log is checked (enabled) under menu selection Properties > Operation Log.) The binary Operation Log is written in descending order by time. The text Operation Log is written in ascending order by time. The Days To Keep configuration is only active for the binary Operation Log. The text Operation Logs are kept until they are manually deleted. Along with the binary version, the Text file version is automatically created and saved in the Operation Log Directory specified under Properties > Operation Log. The binary log can be opened and viewed from within Air Client. The text Operation Log can be opened with any Text Editor, (Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.) The length of the operation log directory name is limited to a maximum 256 characters. Attempts to save an Operation Log file with a longer name display the following warning message: 'The Directory for Operation Log file is too Long, Please adjust to shorter one'. To Open the Operation Log in Air Client 1. From the main menu select File>Open Operation Log. 2. From the browse dialog, navigate to and select the operation log to open. 3. Click OK to open. The Operation Log (binary version) is displayed in its own window Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 80 of 288

81 On-Air Playback Operations To Export the Textfile Operation Log The Air Client text format Operation Log can be exported as required. This allows the log to be read outside the ADC system. 1. Manually navigate to the Operation Log Directory that is specified under menu selection Properties > Operation Log. 2. Copy the desired.txt format Operation Log to a target location. 3. The operator can forward the text Operation Log and/or open it for viewing using any Text Editor, (Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.): 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 81 of 288

82 Playlist Editing Operations Playlist Editing Operations To Open an Existing Playlist Use play list windows to create and edit play lists. 1. From the main menu select File > Open Play List OR on the toolbar select the Open play list icon ( ). 2. Select the play list file you wish to open and view. 3. Once the play list file is open, the file can be checked for accuracy, changes can be made, etc. Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here. Inserting Primary Events Primary events, such as programs and commercials, constitute the majority of a play list s events. They may be accompanied by secondary events, and transition effects. Events can be inserted into a play list using two methods: Manually. You can type event data directly into a play list. Move events to the play list. You can move records from the database or spots from a device storage window directly into a play list, via drag-and-drop or copy-and-paste. Limitation: Do not use the same ID between different record types (i.e. single spot and multisegment event) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 82 of 288

83 Playlist Editing Operations To Insert a Primary Event 1. Position cursor on the list where you want to insert a new event. 2. From the main menu select Events> Insert Primary or press the <INS> button on the keyboard. (A new Primary event is inserted above the cursor.) 3. The cursor will be in Revise Mode. Type in the ID in the ID column. Below is an example of an event in Revise mode. When an ID is entered, it is checked against its record in the database. If the ID is not found, the remaining fields are checked and their values may be changed or left as is according to list options configured in the Environment dialog box. 4. If the record is in the database, the fields will fill in with data when getting out of Revise Mode. 5. Repeat these steps for additional primary events. 6. When finished inserting primary events, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the main menu select Events> Revise to deselect (uncheck). Note: When Insert Primary is selected again while still in Revise Mode the new primary event is placed below the cursor. This speeds up the process of building a play list file or block of events on a transmission list. Inserting Multi-Segment Events When inserting an event with multiple segments as defined in the database, you must specify which segment to insert by entering its number in the Segment field. If you do not enter a segment number, the Select Segment dialog box opens and displays all segments of the multi-segment event. Limitation: Do not use the same ID between different record types (i.e. single spot and multisegment event). To Insert a Segment 1. Click a segment in the Select Segment dialog box, then click OK to insert it into the play list Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 83 of 288

84 Playlist Editing Operations 2. Make changes to event info if necessary. 3. When finished, exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the main menu select Events> Revise to deselect (uncheck). About Display Sequence Gaps Although ADC automatically numbers segments sequentially there are scenarios, such as secondary recording, that can create multi segment records with non-sequential segment numbering (i.e. gaps in the sequence). Air Client displays such a gap properly, including all of the segments with the correct information from the database. Media Client Note: Media Client allows and preserves multi-segment records that have nonsequential segment numbering (i.e. where there is a gap in the number sequence), although it is not intended that such records would be created within the Media Client prep form. Example: Air Client Insert Segment in Playlist Managing Duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs If duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs appear in the Database, the operator can choose which to insert on a Transmission List. 1. When a duplicate ID (e.g. ID 00011) is inserted onto a New, Edit, or Transmission List, on exiting Revise Mode the Select Segment dialog is displayed. 2. Perform one of the following actions as required for the operation. Select Segment dialog: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 84 of 288

85 Playlist Editing Operations Choose Click on Single Spot to get the Single Spot Database Record. Highlight the desired Segment number, and then click OK to get that Segment's Database Record. Highlight the entire record, (Multi Seg), and then click OK to get the entire Multi Segment Database Record. Insert Secondary Events Secondary events are inserted using the Insert Secondary option in the Events menu. Secondary events run in along with the primary event that precedes it. For a list of secondary events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events. For every primary event up to 49 secondary events are allowed. To Insert a Secondary Event 1. Launch a playlist to view. 2. Select an event on the playlist 3. From the Air Client main menu select: Events > Insert Secondary or press the <Shift + Insert> key in the keyboard. The Secondary Events Directory is launched. When inserting a secondary event in a play list, Air Client switches to Revise mode, allowing you to edit field data for the event. You can also click an existing event and click Revise on the Events menu, or press ALT + R, to edit the existing ID or info in the event fields. While viewing a Playlist, the Events Menu will be available. Selecting Insert Secondary (Shift+Insert) in the Events Menu brings up a list of secondary events to choose from. 4. Select the Secondary Events to insert into the playlist. Note: The configuration parameters of some secondary events can be edited. For details on configuring these events see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event. Audio/Video: This function will insert a Secondary Audio/Video event into the list. It is used to air effects with the primary, like keys and or audio over mixes Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 85 of 288

86 Playlist Editing Operations When inserting a new secondary audio/video event in a playlist, play (P) and thread (T), but not auto (A), are entered into the Type field. Switching is not used for this event. The event can be used to produce the audio/video over for a key/ audio over input to a master control switcher or as an audio/video breakaway. An A/V event may be run to switch the switcher. To do this, enter an A, instead of a P or T, in the Type field. The secondary event will begin with an audio-follow video transition. You may also add a transition effect. Backtimed A/V: Same as a regular Sec. Audio/Video event, but the on-air time is the amount of time before the primary event that this event will begin. In the event Type field, these events are inserted with types P and T (but not A). No switching is done on these events, unless this is changed. These events can be used as a key/audio over inputs to a master control switcher. It is possible to associate a switching event with a back timed event. To do this, change the Type field to A. This event starts with an audio-follow-video transition. You may also add a transition effect. NOTE: Backtimed events cannot be run after up-counting events. GPI Contact: Inserts a GPI Contact Closure to a device that initiates a switch. The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time. For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure a GPI Contact. Backtimed GPI: Similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before the start of the associated primary event. A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In this case, the system would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event. NOTE: Backtimed GPI events cannot be attached to an upcount event. For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure a Backtimed GPI Contact. Keyer On/Off: This allows you to define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated primary events video output and is then filled with the output of the Keyer source. For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure a Keyer On/Off. Transition Key: Similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of the associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut, wipe etc.). For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure a Transition Key. Audio Over On/Off: This is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source. The audio over source may replace the primary audio source or be mixed with it. Note: This event is only performed if the primary event s A/V Data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 86 of 288

87 Playlist Editing Operations For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure an Audio Over On/Off. Transition Audio Over: Similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with the primary event and corresponding transition type. For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure a Transition Audio Over. Break: This is inserted at a point in the list where you would like the list to stop running; events will play out normally up to this event. The first event after the break line will cue up, but will not play out, and the program switches to black. To restart the list [after the break line], press Roll or Play on the control panel. This list may also begin if a GPI contact input is used or if preroll is initiated on a hard start event that is next on the list. Comment: Used to enter Notes into the playlist. Any text may be inserted into the title field of a comment. Comment event lines are ignored during transmission. However, they do add events to the list size. You can enter text in the title field up to sixteen characters. Compile ID: Used to attach a title to the head of a compilation list (i.e. It is used to label a compilation list with an ID). It has no effect on the playlist and is ignored during transmission. Data Event: This type of secondary event is associated with a device, but does not generate any video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event would be put on air (i.e. the time entered in the on-air [or Time] column), had the event been associated with a video device. Typically used with video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk server. Secondary data events are used to command serial devices requiring a simple command that does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event. This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is sent to the device to execute the data event command. The primary event can be any primary event for any device. The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. For example, the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary event s title. The command, Delete From Disk, is entered as DEL:XXXXXXXX:YY. X s represent the spot ID and Y s represent the optional port value. The command, Get From Archive, is entered as GFA:XXXXXXXX:YY. The command, Delete From Archive, is entered as DFA:XXXXXXXX:YY. Note: This secondary event may work differently on each device refer to user notes for details on this option. Barter Spot: Used for reconciliation with the traffic system. A barter spot is a source of audio/video that is part of another audio/video source. It is not played as separate audio/video, but is treated as a comment that is passed to the as run log and to the reconciliation process. This event is attached to the primary event. When the primary event finishes running it is logged to the as run log. Attached to a program segment that has barter spots in it [network, nat l]., these events appear in the text as run log as Barter in the status field. In the enterprise log, they appear as BTR in the program type field. The appearance of the spots in the 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 87 of 288

88 Playlist Editing Operations logs does not positively indicate the spots have run. If the primary event runs, the spots are logged; however, the spots may not have actually been on the primary material. Record Switcher: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a recording, this switches to the source denoted in the secondary events Title field. This name must also be in the source name table for the switcher that is supplying the video to the record device. The event is only performed if the primary event s device has the A/V data parameters configured to specify the switcher number that has the matching name in its source name table. Note: The proper configurations must be set before this function can perform as dictated. Switcher Audio Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra audio switching for outputs. It allows routing audio to a different destination. Switcher Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. It allows routing a program from one list to a different destination. While an event plays, this function switches to the secondary event s source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple crosspoints during one primary event. The name of the new source:destination is entered in the title field. Use the format SRC, DEST where SRC is the name of the source and DEST, the destination. You may enter a maximum of 16 characters for the title and the name you enter must also be defined in the switcher s device parameter field for Source Name and/or Destination Name for the switcher that is controlling the output for the primary event. This type of event requires that the primary device have the specified switcher device configured for its switching information. If the secondary event does not specify the source (title =, DEST), the input crosspoint must be specified in the primary event s device for the secondary event to default the destination. For example, in the Title field, put source and destination desired (separated by a comma or space) i.e. Sat1, Telco The program airing from Sat1 will be routed to Telco. This must be configured first in the Device Parameters and not have the same crosspoint as the air source. Secondary Record: Allows for the automated recording and segmenting of live program material, for immediate or future playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event type is used in lists that combine record and playback activities. A secondary record event is attached to each primary event that is being recorded. It functions only in lists that combine record and playback material. Break Sync: Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a time for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event. This event is normally used on a list that contains only pods/breaks of commercials. The pods are separated by either an upcount event or by this Break sync event. The pods are triggered to run by an external contact closure (GPI) or by clicking Play on the control panel. In normal operation, a contact closure/play button is detected and the next pod on the list is played. The break sync event is marked DONE immediately. The pod plays out until either an upcount event, break sync event or the end of the list is encountered. If the next pod has not played by the time of day specified on its break sync event, plus its deviation, the automation sends out a user notification to all automation clients. The event then waits for the opportunity time for a client to respond to the notification. If no response is received at the end of this time, the automation marks 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 88 of 288

89 Playlist Editing Operations each event in the pod and the break sync event as being missed. It stops marking events as missed when it encounters an upcounting event or break sync event. If the list was running an upcount event, that event is skipped and the next upcount event runs. During the time the automation is waiting when the break sync occurs, the user notification is sent to all clients. One or more clients are enabled to detect the user notification. The enabled clients display a dialog box prompting the operator to click OK to Delete Pod and Keep Pod. The dialog box is displayed only during the waiting time and automatically closes if the operator does not respond. This is the equivalent to clicking OK to Delete Pod since the list on the server times out and mark the pod missed. If the operator clicks Keep Pod, a message is sent back to the server causing the server to mark the break sync event as done, but leaves the pod intact waiting for the contact closure/play button. There is no other user notification for this pod. If the contact closure/play button does not occur, the time of day for the break sync event for the next pod may occur. To eliminate a potential problem, the next break sync event is used to mark the previous pod missed. This occurs automatically at the time of day of the next break sync event minus its deviation time. When this occurs, all events before this event are marked missed. If the automation had been running an upcount event, then this upcounter and the next up-counter before this break sync event are terminated before this event runs. Secondary System: Used to allow the sharing of resources between lists. This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move unowned device heads to the list that is running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads. This event is programmed by filling in the time, ID and title fields of the event with control information. The time field controls the time when the event will run offset from the primary event. The following event IDs act as commands to the list: Assign: Will assign the device and head(s) specified in the title field to the transmission list the event is located in. The title format is: DEVICENAME,X[,Y] Where, DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the head number assigned to the list [,Y] is the number of other heads to be assigned. Release: Removes the device and head(s) specified in the event title field from the transmission list the event is located in and returns it back to the system as an unowned device head. The title format is identical to the above described. Protect: Performs a protect assignment on the device and head(s) to the device specified in the type field. The title format is: PROTECTNAME,DEVICENAME,X[,Y] Where, PROTECTNAME is the name of the device that is to be protected. DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 89 of 288

90 Playlist Editing Operations X is the head number assigned to the list. Y is the number of other heads to be assigned. Note: You must first have assigned the primary device heads to the list before assigning the protect heads. Space Character : A space character may be substituted for the comma in any of the title field commands. Backtimed System: Works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event type runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field. External: Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands or other information to a specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the commands. For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure an External Secondary Event. Data Event with Data: Use this event to send commands and other information to a specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To Configure a Data Event with Data. 5. When finished click OK. The secondary event is placed above the cursor in the play list. Configuring an Editable Secondary Event The configuration parameters of some secondary events can be edited. When inserting an editable secondary event, a dialog box allows you to configure its attributes and settings. Editable secondary events include GPI Contact, Back Timed GPI, Keyer On/Off, Transition Key, Audio Over On/Off, Transition Audio Over, External and Data Event with Data. To Configure a GPI Contact This procedure configures a GPI Contact Closure secondary event that has been inserted into the list. IMPORTANT: The GPI event controls the contact closure on a GPI card. The Air Client workstation must have the optional GPI card. For more information about GPI and switchonly device configuration, reference the Device Server Operations and Installation documentation. Note: The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time. 1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary GPI event already in a playlist, click the event s number, and then select Events > Edit Secondary. The Secondary GPI dialog is opened Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 90 of 288

91 Playlist Editing Operations 2. Set the following parameters for each event: ID: Specify the ID of the secondary event (e.g. GPI). If required, click the Browse button ( ) to locate. On Time (offset): An offset indicates how long after the start of the primary event the contact closure should occur. The offset is entered in the event s on-air field. Duration: The duration value sets the duration of the pulse or length of closure of the contact. The duration is entered in the event s DUR field. The GPI closure may be longer than the associated primary event. 3. When finished click OK. To Configure a Backtimed GPI Contact This procedure configures a Backtimed GPI Contact Closure secondary event that has been inserted into the list. Backtimed GPI is similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event. 1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary Backtimed GPI event already in a playlist, click the event s number, and then from the main menu select Events > Edit Secondary. The Backtimed GPI dialog is opened. 2. Set the following parameters for each event: ID: In the playlist, a switch-only device s ID must be entered in the secondary event s ID field. If required, click the Browse button ( ) to locate Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 91 of 288

92 Playlist Editing Operations Back Time (offset): An offset indicates how long before the start of the primary event the contact closure should occur. The offset is entered in the event s on-air field. Duration: Enter the length of time the GPI contact is closed. This value can exceed the duration of the primary event. The duration is entered in the event s DUR field. 3. When finished click OK. To Configure a Keyer On/Off This procedure configures a Keyer On/Off secondary event that has been inserted into the list. This option allows you to define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated primary event s video output and is filled with the output of the Keyer source. 1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary key event already in a playlist, click the event s number, and then from the main menu select Events > Edit Secondary. The Key Event dialog is opened. 2. Set the following parameters for each event: Note: The task performed by the key depends on the capabilities of the device you are using. This function will only be performed if the primary event s A/V Switching data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher. Key to: If ssp field is checked, the key # is placed in the ssp column field. If # field is checked, the key # is placed in the # field. (Valid # range: 1-254) Modifier: This parameter specifies how the key source is outlined. The options are normal, shadow, drop shadow and border Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 92 of 288

93 Playlist Editing Operations Source: The key fill s source. When self is selected, the fill input both cuts and fills the hole. When external is selected, the key input cuts the hole and fill input fills it in. When chroma is selected, the key is determined by the colors of the background video. Matte: When selected, fill input is replaced by a matte source. The matte source color is determined by the mixer controls. Key Hold: When selected, this option will keep the keyer on through subsequent primary transitions. On Time: This will determine the start time of the keyer event. This option determines how long after the start of the primary event the key is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the key will arrive late. Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00: Duration: Determines the length of time the key is overlaid. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next event s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. In order to have the key last as long as the primary event, make the duration field blank. The duration of the keyer event can either be blank, or specified as equal or greater than to: the duration of the primary minus the secondary's (normal) offset the duration of the primary plus the secondary's back timed offset the duration of the secondary's end-timed offset The keyer can be removed by the End Key Hold function. Speed and Effect: The speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located above the time fields. Effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut. Key: Specifies which key source to use. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next event s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. Also, it is not possible to have two transitions overlapping in time; however, you can associate two keys with the same event as long as you set their on time and duration so they do not overlap. 3. When finished click OK. To Configure a Transition Key A Transition Key is similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of the associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut, wipe etc.). 1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary event already in a playlist, click the event s number, and then from the main menu select Events > Edit Secondary. 2. This type of secondary event has a configuration dialog box similar to Keyer On/Off; For the transition key, the value of the offset cannot be set. It is possible to define a transition key event so it will last as long as the primary event. To do this, make the duration field blank Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 93 of 288

94 Playlist Editing Operations If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an ordinary secondary keyer event. 3. When finished click OK. To Configure an Audio Over On/Off Audio Over On/Off is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source. It can be set with a percentage over ratio (For example, if set to 100%, it will completely replace the primary event s audio.) Note: The event is only performed if the primary event s A/V Data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher. 1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary audio over event already in a playlist, click the event s number, and then from the main menu select Events > Edit Secondary. The Audio Over dialog is opened. 2. Set the following parameters for each event: Audio Over: The number of the audio input line on the mixer. Ratio: The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary sources) to 99 (all audio over source). Speed and Effect: The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut. On Time: This determines the start position of the event and how long after the start of the primary event the audio is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the event arrives late; however, you may use the transition. Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00: Duration: Determines the length of time the event is overlaid. Note: To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the duration field blank Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 94 of 288

95 Playlist Editing Operations 3. When finished click OK. To Configure a Transition Audio Over Transition Audio Over is similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with the primary event and corresponding transition type. It allows specification of a secondary audio event to coincide with the primary event in the same manner as a transition keyer event. 1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary Transition Audio Over event already in a playlist, click the event s number, and then from the main menu select Events > Edit Secondary. The Transition Audio Over dialog is opened. The Transition Audio Over dialog options are identical to that of the audio over on/off secondary event, except that the ontime option is missing (the ontime for a transition audio over event is 0). 2. Set the following parameters for each event: Audio Over: The number of the audio input line on the mixer. Ratio: The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary sources) to 99 (all audio over source). Speed and Effect: The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut. Duration: Determines the length of time the event is overlaid. Note: To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the duration field blank. Ontime: The ontime for a transition audio over event is When finished click OK. To Configure an External Secondary Event Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands or other information to a specific device on the device server. 1. When this secondary event is inserted into a list, the Secondary External Event Text Editor dialog box opens that prompts for the data to send to a device. Normally this box is a text editor window, but if there is a special.dll file for the device, this may vary Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 95 of 288

96 Playlist Editing Operations 2. In the text editor, enter the data to send to a device on the network. 3. When finished click OK. Air Client inserts a line in the playlist or transmission window and enters into Revise mode. vdt is inserted in the Sec field. 4. When finished, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode on the list, from the main menu select Events > Revise or press <ALT + R>. To Configure a Data Event with Data A Data Event with Data secondary event is used to send commands and other information to a specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the commands. 1. When this secondary event is inserted into a list, a text editor dialog box opens that prompts for the data to send to a device Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 96 of 288

97 Playlist Editing Operations 2. In the text editor, enter the data to send to a device on the network. 3. When finished click OK. Air Client inserts a line in the playlist or transmission window and enters into Revise mode. sdat is inserted in the Sec field. 4. When finished, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode on the list, from the main menu select Events > Revise or press <ALT + R>. The time in the time field is the offset from the preroll of the associated primary event. At the offset time, the commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. Manage Back-Timed Events It is possible to create a back-timed event by editing the event type instead of having to replace the event with a back-timed event. This is accomplished by placing a < feature in the event type field to create a back-timed event. Event Type Field Syntax StartEventEndTimed = PT > MatchPrimaryDuration = PT = StartEventBackTimed = PT < A > feature in the event type field creates an end-timed event. It is recommend to stop using backtime event types (Like: bgpi, bav, etc) and instead use the normal events (sgpi, sav) with the backtime modifier (PT <). These events are available on the translator as ExtendedEventControl := [tstarteventendtimed] or [tstarteventbacktimed] Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed The following Lists which secondary events can be back-timed by enabling the StartEventBackTimed bit in the event control field. Data Events can be run back-timed. When run back-timed they are run at the offset value before the first frame of the primary they are attached to. Transition events (KEY and AUDIO OVER) always run at pre-roll of the primary. Keyer, Audio Over, Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over or Key, Record Switcher, and Source Switcher Events cannot be back-timed. While it might seem that there are uses for this, these events require using the primary event to handle switching, and the primary event may not be threaded at the time these events are run. Without having a primary device threaded there is no way to establish the audio/video output path to apply the switch to. There may also be a conflict with using the Master Control switcher during the transition of the actual primary. EVENT TYPE ALLOWED Break Event (Stops List) no Logo Event (Equivalent to Break Event) no Audio/Video Event YES Back-timed Audio/Video Event no 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 97 of 288

98 Playlist Editing Operations EVENT TYPE GPI Event Back-timed GPI Event Keyer On/Off Transition Keyer On/Off Audio Over On/Off Transition Audio Over On/Off Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over Combined Audio/Video with Key BreakSync Event (custom feature) Data Event System Event Back-Timed System Event Record Switcher Event Source Switcher Event Record Device Event (for recording live events) Comment Event Compile ID Barter Spot ALLOWED YES no no no no no no no no YES YES no no no no no no no For a reference of secondary events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events. To Specify PT Event Type syntax 1. Open a list. 2. Highlight a primary event 3. Insert a target secondary event (See above Secondary Events that can be Back- Timed.) Or Select an existing secondary event. (See above Secondary Events that can be Back- Timed.) 4. Enter Revise Mode 5. Specify Type as the desired Event Type syntax (PT >, PT =, PT <) 6. Exit Revise Mode. Manage End-Timed Events End-timed means offset from the end of the primary event. Secondary events can be end-timed by enabling the StartEventEndTimed bit in the event control field Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 98 of 288

99 Playlist Editing Operations Secondary events can be started at an offset from the end of the primary event (endtimed). This is accomplished by placing a > feature in the event type field to create an end-timed event. Event Type Field Syntax StartEventEndTimed = PT > MatchPrimaryDuration = PT = StartEventBackTimed = PT < A < feature in the event type field creates a back-timed event. These events are available on the translator as ExtendedEventControl := [tstarteventendtimed] or [tstarteventbacktimed] When Enabling a Key End-timed events can be used to enable a key on the last 20 seconds of program material. Since the exact program segments length may not be known by traffic at the time the schedule is made, an end-timed event allows traffic to accurately bring the key on for the last 20 seconds. When Event Duration Matches the Offset When using end-timed offset events whose duration matches the offset, such as an Audio Over device that runs 20 seconds from the end for 20 seconds, there are two ways to specify this event. Put 20 seconds in for the duration for the event, or Use any arbitrary duration, but enable the MatchPrimaryDuration bit in the event control field. Secondary Events that can be End-Timed The following table lists which secondary events can be end-timed by enabling the StartEventEndTimed bit in the event control field. Transition events (KEY and AUDIO OVER) always run at pre-roll of the primary. End-timed events following UpCounter events are not supported. EVENT TYPE ALLOWED Break Event (Stops List) no Logo Event (Equivalent to Break Event) no Audio/Video Event YES Back-timed Audio/Video Event no GPI Event YES Back-timed GPI Event no Keyer On/Off YES Transition Keyer On/Off no Audio Over On/Off YES Transition Audio Over On/Off no 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 99 of 288

100 Playlist Editing Operations EVENT TYPE Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over Combined Audio/Video with Key BreakSync Event (custom feature) Data Event System Event BackTimed System Event Record Switcher Event Source Switcher Event Record Device Event (for recording live events) Comment Event Compile ID Barter Spot ALLOWED YES YES no YES YES no YES YES no no no no To Specify PT Event Type syntax 1. Open a list. 2. Highlight a primary event 3. Insert a target secondary event (See above Secondary Events that can be End-Timed.) Or Select an existing secondary event. (See above Secondary Events that can be End- Timed.) 4. Enter Revise Mode 5. Specify Type as the desired Event Type syntax (PT >, PT =, PT <) 6. Exit Revise Mode. Enable a List Freeze ADC offers the ability to freeze on the last frame of a videodisk clip before a live (generally a promo, or a specific buffer event) in order to wait if the journalist is not ready on time and make the switching to the live manually on the MCS. Option 1: Using a secondary Backtimed System event (bsys) 1. For a List with a Preroll of 2 seconds, if a Freeze is required on the last frame of a Profile clip before a live break: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 100 of 288

101 Playlist Editing Operations 2. Attach a Backtimed System event (bsys) to the Live event to freeze: 3. Increase the Duration of Profile clip (Demo0001) before the news break (STUDIO1 switch-only) to 5 seconds to ensure the preroll of STUDIO1 will not have started when the freeze event plays. 4. Set the Backtimed offset of the freeze event to play on frame 00:00:09.17 after the beginning of Demo0001. This to effectively address the device latency involved with executing the freeze (7 frames) 00:00:09.24 (i.e. the last frame). 5. The result is: 6. Once the list is frozen, the operator switches manually the MCS to the live source. Option 2: Using a Secondary System event (ssys) 1. If a Freeze is required on the last frame of a Profile clip before a live break, attach a Secondary System event (ssys) to the event to freeze: 2. The result is: 3. Once the list is frozen, the operator switches manually the MCS to the live source. Enable a Data Event (sdat) A Data Event is a type of secondary event that is associated with a device, but does not generate any video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event would be put on air, had the event been associated with a video device Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 101 of 288

102 Playlist Editing Operations For video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk server. Secondary data events are Secondary Events used to command serial devices requiring a simple command that does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event. Note: This secondary event may work differently based on the device being used. For a list of secondary events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events. Data Event Commands This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is sent to the device to execute the data event command. The primary event can be any primary event for any device. The ID of the secondary data event must match the ID MATCH NAME of the disk port to perform the action. Multiple Secondary Data Events may be placed on a single primary event. The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. As an example, the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary event s title. These events are executed at preroll time of the primary event. Since these commands are performed instantly no heads are threaded and the disk status does not change (unless the disk goes BUSY for a moment). The event is marked done if the ADC sends the command to the disk. The event is marked missed if ADC cannot execute the command for any reason. While many of these functions are not implemented on many disk systems, the following functions have been implemented: Local Disk System Commands Delete: DEL:AnID or D:AnID Delete Protect: PRO:AnID or P:AnID Delete UnProtect: UNP:AnID or U:AnID Archive System Commands Get From Archive: GFA:AnID:TapeID or G:AnID:TapeID Delete From Archive: DFA:AnID:TapeID Send To Archive: STA:AnID:TapeID or S:AnID:TapeID Network or Fiber Channel System Commands Delete From System: DFS:AnID Move or Copy To Disk: MOV:AnID:#1:#2 or M:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4 or C:AnID:#1:#2:#3:# Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 102 of 288

103 Playlist Editing Operations Delete From Disk: DFN:AnID:#1 Abort Disk Transfer: ANC:AnID:#1:#2 or A:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4 or T:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4 Command Parameter descriptions: AnID is the ID to perform the function on. #1 is the source unit number of the source video disk in the networked disk system. #2:#3:#4 are destination unit numbers configured for the networked disk system (only one destination is required, but as many that will fit in the title field may be specified. TapeID is an optional parameter that is the Tape ID of the tape in the archive system that this file should be operated on. Add a Transition Effect Transition effects can be added between events in a playlist. A master control switcher is required to use transition effects. A transition effect is configurable according to type, speed, key hold status and mixed audio/video and wipe effect qualifiers. 1. Open a Playlist and ensure Revise mode is off/disabled. To exit Revise mode on the list, from the main menu select Events > Revise or press <ALT + R>. 2. Select the event in a playlist to assign the transition to by clicking the event number of the event. 3. From the main menu select Events > Edit Effect. The Transition Effects dialog is displayed. 4. Configure the following options as required: Transition Type: Select the type of effect to run between events by using the icons located next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut. Transition Speed: Select the speed of the transition effect. Options are Slow, Medium, Fast Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 103 of 288

104 Playlist Editing Operations End Key Hold: Checking this box causes the transition of an event to remove any key that was held by a previous keyer event. #: Specify the qualifier for mixed audio/video and wipe effect. Qualifier values range from 0 to 255 and are facility-dependent. 5. When finished click OK. Cut, Copy, Paste Playlist Events The following procedures outline basic Cut, Copy Paste operations that can be performed from a Playlist. To Cut an Event from a Playlist 1. Select event to be cut by clicking on event number on list that corresponds to current location of event to be cut. 2. From the main menu select Edit > Cut. The event is cut from the list and put onto a clipboard in the software. To Cut a Block of Events from a Playlist 1. Select the first event of a block to be cut by clicking an event number on list that corresponds to current location of event to be cut. 2. Holding down the Shift key, use the mouse to select the last event of a contiguous block of events. This causes a sequence of events to be highlighted. 3. From the main menu select Edit > Cut. The block of events is cut from the list and put onto a clipboard in the software Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 104 of 288

105 Playlist Editing Operations To Copy an Event from a Playlist 1. Select event to be copied by clicking on event number on list that corresponds to current location of event to be copied. (The event remains on the playlist or transmission list when copy is chosen). 2. From the main menu select Edit > Copy. The event is copied onto a clipboard in the software. To Copy a Block of Events from a Playlist 1. Select the first event of a block to be copied by clicking an event number on list that corresponds to current location of event to be copied. 2. Holding down the Shift key, use the mouse to select the last event of a contiguous block of events. This causes a sequence of events to be highlighted. 3. From the main menu select Edit > Copy. The block of events is copied from the list and put onto a clipboard in the software. To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s) 1. Position the yellow cursor on the play list where the event will be pasted Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 105 of 288

106 Playlist Editing Operations 2. From the main menu select Edit > Paste. This pastes the event(s) into the list at the specified location. Copy/Paste Cells A cell can be Copied / Pasted in the Air Client Play list form or Transmission list form. 1. Select the cell to be copied. IMPORTANT: Cell copy is only permitted from three columns: Title, SOM, or DUR column. 2. Copy the Cell: From the main menu select Edit > Copy. The event is copied onto a clipboard in the software. 3. Position the yellow cursor on the play list column where the event will be pasted. IMPORTANT: The selected pasted cell must have the same column index as the copied cell. (e.g. A cell cut or copied from the Title column can only be pasted in the Title column.) 4. From the main menu select Edit > Paste. This pastes the event(s) into the list at the specified location. Clear / Delete Playlist Events Use the following procedure to delete an event from a playlist. Note: Events must be unthreaded before they can be deleted. 1. Select an event to be deleted. Click the event number on the list that corresponds to current location of event to be cut Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 106 of 288

107 Playlist Editing Operations 2. From the main menu select Edit > Clear or press <Delete> on the keyboard. This deletes the event off of the list. Note: This event is not placed on the clipboard. Once deleted it is gone. To Clear a Block of Events from a Playlist 1. Select the first event of a block to be copied by clicking an event number on list that corresponds to current location of event to be copied. 2. Holding down the Shift key, use the mouse to select the last event of a contiguous block of events. This causes a sequence of events to be highlighted. 3. From the main menu select Edit > Clear. The block of events is cleared from the list and put onto a clipboard in the software. Note: The events are not placed on the clipboard. Once deleted they are gone Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 107 of 288

108 Playlist Editing Operations Moving Events within a List and Between Lists An operator can use drag- and-drop or Cut and Paste on the Edit menu to move (reorder) events within a playlist, copy events between playlists, or copy events from a device storage window or database window directly into a play list. Edit Operation Notes An event must be dragged by its event or spot number to move it to a playlist. When dragging-and-dropping, all secondary events associated with primary events are moved with the primary event. This is not true when using cut and paste. Drag and drop only works within the look ahead. You cannot drag an event from beyond the look to within the look ahead. Cut and Paste will work if an event is Beyond the look ahead and needs to be placed within the look ahead. Warning: Unless the List options menu is set to get around this, copy-and-paste should never be used if you are using a traffic system that uses reconciliation because this causes the event to repeat the reconciliation key. Open the source List(s) Open the list or lists to be used when moving events: If moving events within a single playlist, open the playlist. If moving between playlists, open the destination playlist, and the source playlists. If moving from other windows to a playlist, open the destination playlist, and the source windows (device storage window and/or database window) To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event 1. Select the event to be dragged. Click the event number on the list that corresponds to current location of event to be cut and continue to hold down on the mouse button. 2. Drag up or down to the location the event will be dropped. (note stay in the event column) 3. Position yellow cursor on the play list where the event will be dropped. 4. Release the mouse button to drop the selected event above the cursor Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 108 of 288

109 Playlist Editing Operations Dragging and dropping within one window is effectively a cut and paste Dragging and dropping from one window to another is a copy, paste To Drag-and-Drop Multiple events 1. Press and hold the Shift key and click an event, then click-hold another event to select a range. 2. Drag the selection to an event in the playlist before which you want to insert the selection. The yellow cursor is positioned on the play list where the event will be dropped. 3. Release the mouse button to drop it. The events are inserted above the target location. Move Events using Copy / Paste Warning: Copy-and-paste should never be used if you are using a traffic system that uses reconciliation because this will cause the event to repeat the reconciliation key. 1. As an alternative to drag-and-drop, click an event, spot or record, or the range of, then from the main menu select Edit > Copy. 2. Click the event in a playlist after which you want to insert the selection, and then from the main menu select Edit > Paste. Revise Playlist Event Field Text Revise allows the operator to revise (edit) the text in a particular field of an event. 1. Position cursor on a specific event field. 2. From the main menu select Events > Revise or press <Alt+R> on the keyboard.. A check mark appears next to the Revise option in the menu. This indicates the client is in Revise Mode. Revise is also shown at the top of the window. The cursor is now in Revise Mode ready to type. 3. Revise the event as needed. If Enter is pressed prior to getting out of Revise Mode the database will be checked. If ID is not found, a warning message will appear. 4. When finished exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the main menu select Events> Revise to deselect (uncheck). Note: If currently in Revise Mode Cancel can be used to put event back to what it was prior revising the event. Cancel does not work if the operator already clicked off the revised event, or the operator already got out of revise mode) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 109 of 288

110 Playlist Editing Operations Clear Done Events An event that is marked done can be dragged and dropped down the transmission list and then re-activated so it can play on the list again. 1. Position the cursor on the event that is marked Done. 2. Drag and drop this event down the list to where it will need to re-air. 3. With the cursor on the Done event that was dragged, right click on the playlist window and from the popup menu select Clear Done Events. Replace an Event ID Replace allows operator to find and then replace the ID with a designated ID. 1. Position the cursor at the top of the list in the ID column. 2. From the main menu select Edit > Replace. The Replace ID dialog is displayed. 3. Specify the search parameters: Find what field: Type in the ID to find. (e.g. Demo0001) Replace with field: Type in the ID to replace with. Match whole word only. Check to have search look for whole word matches. Match case: Check to have search look only for entries that match the case (Upper or Lower) for the entry specified in the Find what field. Ignore secondary event: Check to ignore secondary events in "Find" operation. (When a search in list is typically done, the result includes secondary events. If there is a secondary event with the same ID, the user may not want to find it.) Direction: Specify the search direction: Up the list or Down the list form the current cursor position. 4. Select Find Next. 5. If the ID is in the database, an information box appears with the database info for the replacement ID Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 110 of 288

111 Playlist Editing Operations 6. Select OK to replace the found ID with the replacement ID. 7. (Repeat steps 4 6 until all records are found.) Note: Replace All can be used to speed up the process. Ensure the replacement spot is not already in a break with the ID being replaced. This will prevent the same spot to air back to back. Ripple Time AutoRipple is the process of adjusting the time column to reflect the time of day each event will play based on the duration of each event. As an event plays to air, the time field of the events following down the list will adjust as necessary to reflect the approximate time of day they will execute. The exception to this scenario is if a hardstart is located on an event. A hardstart will not allow the times to ripple past it and the events following may not reflect the correct time of day they will actually play. Due to this blocking of AutoRipple it may be necessary to ripple the times manually to keep the list accurate to what time of day the events will play. To Manually Ripple Times 1. Position cursor in a column of the event that the Ripple Time will be initiated from Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 111 of 288

112 Playlist Editing Operations 2. From the main menu select Events > Ripple Time or press <Alt+M> on the keyboard.. The time field ripples from the event the cursor is located on down to the next hard start or the end of the list. Each successive event is offset by the duration of the previous primary event. Note: All events start times are changed until a hard start event is encountered. Hard start events interrupt any preceding events whose times overlap its start time. Checking if a List is Timed Out Ripple time can be used between hard starts to check if the list is timed out between the hard starts. If Ripple Time is initiated on an event and a hard start is located on a future event an info box appears if the events are running long or short to the future hard start. The info box informs the operator if there is overlap (long) or gap (short) time to the next hardstart. Managing Pull Lists Review Missing Events using the Pull List Window The Pull List window lists all missing events in a play list. Missing media are events not located in any of the devices assigned to the transmission list that the Pull List was generated from. Once opened, the Pull List Window can be refreshed on demand (F5 key and Refresh function of its contextual menu). 1. Ensure a list is open for viewing 2. From the main menu select Events > Pull List. A Choose Order box appears. 3. Choose the order to display any found missing material Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 112 of 288

113 Playlist Editing Operations 4. Click OK. Any missing items appear on the Pull List. The event column designates the location of the missing event on the play list. The TOD Time of day column is the time of day on the play list the event is scheduled to play. The Comment column indicates by a Not Made comment if the record is not in the database. The Occurrences column shows the number of times the event is scheduled on the play list. The SOM and Duration on the Air Client Pull List allow it to be used as a Dub List on the Media Client. The Segment number (01 to 99) field can be displayed. Note: Inclusion of Segment numbers in the Air Client Pull List will be addressed in a future version of Air Client. Timezone in a Pull List A Pull List asked for a List with a Time Zone configured will take in account the Time Zone in the TOD column of the Pull List. The Time Zone name is displayed in the title bar of the Pull List window (like for the List window), and the offset value in the status bar Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 113 of 288

114 Playlist Editing Operations GMT Pull Lists The GMT Pull List option allows to list in the Pull List only the clips missing in the devices assigned to the List and not in a GMT source device usable for this List. This helps operators determine if the missing media is already loaded into a GMT source device if it is not on the Pull List. The Use GMT Pull List" parameter is set in Properties> Environment > List Options tab. The Administrator or operator with security rights can choose the new GMT Pull List by checking this option on the List Options tab of Properties/Environment menu. As with others options (e.g., Storage Options/ Display Free Disk space), a confirm/warning dialog box is displayed to the operator when this feature is selected. From this dialog the operator can: Click Ok to confirm and enable new option. This parameter is saved in the.ini file of the application so the selection is not lost when the Air Client is closed. Click Cancel to invalidate option. If Enabled (Checked), when the operator chooses Events/Pull List menu items, the Pull List window is displayed on top of the transmission window and a warning message appears (Job in Progress) highlighted Red along the bottom of the Pull List window. Once complete, the warning message in Pull List window disappears. It is not listed in the Pull List result Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 114 of 288

115 Playlist Editing Operations If Disabled (Unchecked), is it is listed in the Pull List result. Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List The ADC Air Client v3, Pull List utility allows the show/hide of columns on the Pull List display. This option is similar in functionality to the Columns option of the playlist/transmission list. 1. Right click on the Pull List and from the right-click popup menu select Columns. The Column setting dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 115 of 288

116 Playlist Editing Operations 2. Use the Column setting dialog to specify which columns to show or hide. 3. Select a Column in the Available columns or Displayed columns area and choose arrows to move it to the opposite area. Single arrows (<, >) move individual columns moves entry from Available pane to Show pane. moves entry from Show pane to Available pane. Reset moves all columns to the Show pane. Cancel aborts the operation and closed the Column Configuration dialog. Help launches the application Help system. 4. Click OK. When the Pull List is displayed the columns shown will be as specified. Recycle Bin Window When the Air Client software user deletes one or several events from the Transmission list, if the Link to Recycle Bin option of the Transmission list is checked, those events are written into the RECYCLE.lst file. The Link to Recycle bin option is located in the "Security" tab of the Playlist Options Menu (right click menu on transmission list). This setting if enable is active for each list independently. Multi-login to several device servers is managed (relative parameters saved in aclnt32.ini) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 116 of 288

117 Playlist Editing Operations This RECYCLE.lst file is saved in the local directory of the Air Client application. Retrieve Deleted Events from the Recycle Bin Window The Air Client software can retrieve the deleted events in the Recycle Bin window that displays the Recycle.lst file. This file saves the events deleted from a transmission as well as the cut events, in the case where the user cuts some events but does not paste them, so those events could be lost. When a primary event with hidden secondary events is cut or deleted from the list, the primary and its relative secondary events are copied in the Recycle Bin. Any new entry of a cut/deleted block is done at the top of the in the Recycle Bin. The chronology of the action can be easily found. At each modification of Recycle.lst file, the Recycle Bin window is updated. Possible modifications include: the insertion of events in the Recycle.lst file and a purge on an event. To use the Recycle Bin From the main menu select Tools > Recycle Bin, OR on the toolbar click the Recycle Bin icon ( ). The Recycle Bin window is displayed with any contents. To reuse the events of the Recycle Bin window in a transmission list or in a playlist, the user can use a copy/paste or a drag&drop operation. Clicking on a block header selects all the events of the bloc. This allows an easy and fast selection before copy or drag-and-drop action. Each cut or deleted event or block of events begins with a header that gives information about the edition action made on this range. The header is a comment event giving the following information: In the Time field: The hour of the edition action. In the ID field: The action done (DELETE / CUT) on the event(s) under the header. In the Title field: The Server name - the List name where the action was done - The Date of the action Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 117 of 288

118 Playlist Editing Operations About Configuring the Recycle Bin To enable use of RECYCLE.lst In normal operation the RECYCLE.lst file is not use as a standard play list, but through the Recycle Bin feature. The administrator sets this option by: 1. Right click on an open playlist window and from the popup menu select Options This opens the Options dialog box 2. From the Options dialog select Security tab and enable (check) Link to Recycle Bin option. The access to the functions of this Security tab is granted to the System Configuration permission only, from login. To Configure Colors The foreground and background colors of the Header comment event are configurable from the Colors command of the pop-up menu that opens the standard configuration color of event dialog box (it is also the case for Playlist and List). 1. Open the Recycle Bin window 2. Right click on the Recycle Bin Window and from the popup menu select Colors. The Select Colors dialog is displayed. 3. Use this dialog to set Event Colors and select default colors. For details on using this dialog see Configuring Window Parameter Colors. To Configure a Purge To prevent the Recycle.lst file from becoming huge, a purge of the oldest part of the file can be configured by the administrator. Note: The access to the functions of this Security tab is granted to the System Configuration permission only, from login. 1. Right click on the Recycle Bin Window and from the popup menu select Options. The Recycle Bin Options dialog is displayed. 2. Use the Purge tab of the Recycle Bin Options dialog to configure purge operations for this window Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 118 of 288

119 Playlist Editing Operations Configure the following parameters as required: Start Of Day: Define the time of the triggering of the purge. Hours To Keep: Specify which events, in the Recycle.lst file, will be kept or not. 3. When finished click OK. The events, which exist in the Recycle.lst file that are greater than the defined hours, are deleted. Saving a Play List File 1. Select a play list file or the On Air transmission list to save. 2. From the main menu select: File > Save Play List (To save the Play List to the current file name. This will overwrite if filename exists already) OR File > Save Play list As (To save the Play List to a different file name. A file type can be selected prior to saving). 3. In the Save Playlist dialog, type in a new file name or accept the existing file name. 4. Select Save Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 119 of 288

120 Managing Resource Windows Managing Resource Windows Robust Database Search Window Air Client allows for full database searches using the Robust Database Search Window. This window allows an operator to search for and review records of existing spots and, if spot information is already recorded in the database, to export the information to the playlist. Search Pane Search Results Pane Show Details Pane To Search for a Record 1. From the main menu select File> Robust Database Search. This opens the Robust Database Search window. Search Parameters are specified in the Find records Group box. (Option: Clicking the DB icon ( search window.) ) on the toolbar launches the robust database Record types Search Range Search By Field Parameter Fields 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 120 of 288

121 Managing Resource Windows 2. In the Find Records pane, specify the Record Types: Click the type of record(s) you to search for. These settings are used to limit searches to records of certain types. To include a record type in a search, select its checkbox. To exclude a record type from a search, uncheck the box. The default is to include all record types (all boxes checked). To include all listed record types in a search, click the All button. To exclude all listed record types from a search, click the None button. Available record Types: The record types available for inclusion or exclusion in a search are: Single: A single spot record. A single spot has only one SOM and EOM. Aspot: A master spot on a multi-spot library tape. Bspot: A backup spot on a multi-spot library tape. Multi-Seg: A multi-segment record. A multi-segment record can have multiple SOMs and EOMs, whereas a single spot can have only one SOM and EOM. Lib Box: (Tape only). The ID of a multi-spot record. The library box contains from 1 to 99 spots, with each spot containing its own unique material ID. P-Arch: A record associating a primary archive cartridg e numerical ID with an alphanumeric archive ID. B-Arch: A record associating a backup archive cartridg e numerical ID with an alphanumeric archive ID. Disk: A record created in Louth TurboMedia for material residing on a video disk. 3. In the Find Records pane, select the Search By field type. This parameter determines on which field a database search is based. The exception to this is Duplicates (see below). The values for the Search By parameter may be any of the following: Material ID. The ID of the spot. Title. The title of the spot. User Data. This parameter searches for the text in the User Data field of the spot s record that matches the text in the adjacent parameter field. Only 6 characters can be specified if you are using a standard database and 16 if you are using an extended database. Note: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility should be configured in the same mode (extended or non-extended). Made On. Searches for spots that were created on the same date as specified in the adjacent parameter field Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 121 of 288

122 Managing Resource Windows Played. Searches for spots played on the date specified, if the Air Client workstation that played the spot is configured to record play dates. If it is not, you will not be able to find the spot you are looking for by this parameter. Purge On. Searches for spots that will be purged on the date specified. Tape ID. Searches for text in three fields Media ID, Box ID and Alternate ID that matches the text entered in the adjacent parameter field. Duplicates. Searches for duplicate material IDs that exist for more than one type of spot and displays them in the Search Results pane. Note: When Duplicates, Purge On and Tape ID are specified as search parameters, all records types are searched. Any settings you specified in the Record Types area are ignored. For example, you cannot search for duplicate single spots only. 4. In the Parameter field next to the Search By field, enter all, or a segment of, the information the property you specified above must contain. 5. In the Find Records pane, choose the Search Range. These search qualifiers determine how specific the search is. Two different Collation sets are currently being used with ADC SQL Servers. Your search results depend on Collation set for which your Database is configured. The following logical operators are available: NOTE: When specifying a range of values, the value in the first parameter field must be less than the value in the second parameter field or an error message displays. The hierarchical search order of characters and numbers is: numbers come before capital letters and capital letters come before lowercase letters. When specifying a range of dates, the first date specified in the range must be earlier than the second. Is. This operator only lists records that contain the exact value specified in the parameter field. For example, by specifying Material ID in the Search Qualifiers field, enter in the Parameter field, selecting qualifier Is, and then pressing the Search button, only the spot whose ID number is appears in the Search Results pane. Is between. When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the Search Qualifiers fields. The values entered in these Parameter fields determine the range that the value of the property must be between. For example, by specifying Material ID in the Search Qualifiers field, entering 011 in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Is between, entering 003 in the bottom 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 122 of 288

123 Managing Resource Windows Parameter field, and then clicking the Search button, only the spot whose ID number is 002 appears in the Search Results pane. Is before. This operator lists records whose property value precedes the value of the property specified in the Search Parameters field. For example, by specifying Material ID in the Search Qualifiers field, entering in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Is before, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose ID number is less than appear in the Search Results pane. Is after. This operator lists records whose property value comes after the value specified in the Search Parameter field. For example, by specifying Material ID in the Search Qualifiers field, entering 001 in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Is after, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose ID number is greater than 001 appear in the Search Results pane. Is outside. When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the Search Qualifiers fields. This operator lists records whose property value is outside values specified in the Search Parameter fields. The value entered in the Parameter fields determine the range that the value of the Search by Type field (see step 3 above) must be outside. For example, by specifying Material ID in the Search Qualifiers field, entering 100 in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Is outside, entering 200 in the bottom Parameter field, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose ID number is less that 100 and greater than 200 appear in the Search Results pane. Begins with: This operator lists records whose property value begins with the string value specified in the Search Parameter fields Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 123 of 288

124 Managing Resource Windows For example, by specifying Material ID in the Search Qualifiers field, entering 111 in the Parameter field, selecting qualifier Begins with and then clicking the Search button, only the spots whose ID number begin with 111 appear in the Search Results pane. Contains: This operator lists records whose property value contains the string value specified in the Search Parameter field. For example, by specifying Title in the Search Qualifiers field, entering Test in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Contains, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose Title contains the string Test appear in the Search Results pane. Contains(or): When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the Search Qualifiers fields. This operator lists only records whose property value contains either one or both string values specified in the Search Parameter fields. For example, by specifying Title in the Search Qualifiers field, entering Test in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Contains(or), specifying Search in the bottom Parameter field, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose Title contains the string Test and/or the string Search appear in the Search Results pane. Contains(and): When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the Search Qualifiers fields. This operator lists only records whose property value contains both string values specified in the Search Parameters fields. For example, by specifying Title in the Search Qualifiers field, entering Test in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Contains(and), specifying Search in the bottom Parameter field, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose Title contains the string Test and the string Search appear in the Search Results pane Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 124 of 288

125 Managing Resource Windows Does not contain: This operator lists only records whose selected property value does not contain the string value specified in the Search Parameter field. For example, by specifying Title in the Search Qualifiers field, entering Test in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Does not contain, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose Title do not contain the string Test appear in the Search Results pane. Does not contain(or): When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the Search Qualifiers fields. This operator lists only records whose selected property value does not contain one or both string values specified in the Search Parameter fields. For example, by specifying Title in the Search Qualifiers field, entering Test in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Does not contain(or), entering Search in the bottom Parameter field, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose Title do not contain the string Test and/or the string Search appear in the Search Results pane. Does not contain(and): When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the Search Qualifiers fields. This operator lists only records whose selected property value does not contain either string value specified in the Search Parameters fields. For example, by specifying Title in the Search Qualifiers field, entering Test in the top Parameter field, selecting qualifier Does not contain(and), entering Search in the bottom Parameter field, and then clicking the Search button, only spots whose Title do not contain the string Test and the string Search appear in the Search Results pane. 6. Once the search parameters are specified, click the Search button. The results are displayed in the Search Results pane, located under the Find Records pane Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 125 of 288

126 Managing Resource Windows A Results Summary is displayed at the bottom left corner of the window. Found: # of records found that met search criteria. Selected: # of ID s highlighted. 7. (Optional) Records can be sorted (ascending/descending order) by clicking on a column header and property columns resized by dragging with the mouse. Managing Search Results The results of a database search are displayed in the Search Results pane. Right Click Popup menu A right click menu is available from the Search results pane to help manage search results. Option Copy CopyAll Save As Text Print Print Notes Show Spots/Segments Description Copies the highlighted record Copies all records in the Search Results pane. Allows the user to save the highlighted records to a text file. Prints the highlighted records. A printer must be configured. If this option is selected the checkmark indicates it is selected and Print is chosen, any notes associated with any selected record will also be printed. This option will display more information about selected Multi- Segment or Multi-Spot records. If one of these record types is selected when this option is chosen, the spots or segments associated with that ID will be displayed in a separate pop-up box Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 126 of 288

127 Managing Resource Windows Option Show Spots/Segments (no sorting) Show Search Panel and Show Details Panel Description <<This option is grayed out and currently unavailable.>> When these options are on as they are shown here the database window will display as it does on the previous page. If these options are turned off, either the search panel the panel including the search parameters or the Details panel the panel on the bottom of the screen displaying the details of a selected record will disappear from the screen allowing more records to be displayed in the search results panel. To Review Record Details Select / highlight a record in the search results pane. All available information on the selected record is displayed in the Show Details pane located beneath the Search Results pane. Select the desired tab to see various information related to the record. If multiple records are highlighted, the fields of the last record clicked are displayed in the Database Parameter pane. To change the column width The width of each column may be adjusted by passing the cursor over the right edge of the column, and holding down the mouse button to drag the edge of the column when the cursor resembles a crosshair. To Resize Columns If any particular record information, such as ID or title, is too wide to be displayed in a column, the information is truncated and followed by ellipses (...). You can widen columns to show the truncated information Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 127 of 288

128 Managing Resource Windows To widen a column: 1. Position the pointer over the right border of the column heading. 2. Drag the border to the right. If the total width of the columns exceeds that of the Search Results pane, a scroll bar appears at the bottom of the pane, allowing you to scroll hidden columns into view. To Sort Records by Column You can determine how records are sorted in the Search Results pane using their property column header. Click on a field's column heading to sort all the records displayed in the Search Results pane by that field. The order of the sort follows the alphanumeric hierarchy: numbers come before capital letters, and capital letters come before lowercase letters. Each click on a header toggles sort in ascending or descending order. For example, if records are listed in ascending order, clicking the ID column header sorts them in descending order. To Save As Text Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane, and then from the popup menu select Save As Text. Saves the output displayed in the Search Results pane as a data (.dat) file. Selecting this command invokes a dialog which prompts the user for the filename to save as. To Print Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane and from the pop-up menu select Print. Prints the output displayed in the Search Results pane. Selecting this command invokes a dialog which allows the user to configure the print job. Show Segments This option is available for multi-segment only; it is grayed out for all other selections. Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane, and then from the popup menu select Show Segments. Opens a Segments Record dialog that displays segment information of a highlighted multisegment program display Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 128 of 288

129 Managing Resource Windows About Display Sequence Gaps Although ADC automatically numbers segments sequentially there are scenarios, such as secondary recording, that can create multi segment records with non-sequential segment numbering (i.e. gaps in the sequence). Air Client displays such a gap properly, including all of the segments with the correct information from the database. Media Client Note: Media Client allows and preserves multi-segment records that have nonsequential segment numbering (i.e. where there is a gap in the number sequence), although it is not intended that such records would be created within the Media Client prep form. Example: Air Client Database Showing More Records There are two options available: [Show Search Panel] and [Show Details Panel]. Both are for expanding display area of search result panel. Disable Show Search Panel Right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu disable (uncheck) Show Search Panel. This action hides the Find Records tab pane. Hiding the Find Records tab pane expands the Search Results pane, allowing more records to be viewed at one time Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 129 of 288

130 Managing Resource Windows To re-enable the display of this area, right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu enable (check) Show Search Panel. Disable Show Details Panel Right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu disable (uncheck) Show Details Panel. This action hides the area displaying additional information of the highlighted record and the Find Records Material, Media, and Notes tab panes. Hiding this area expands the Search Results pane, allowing more records to be viewed at one time. To re-enable the display of this area, right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu enable (check) Show Details Panel. To Copy a Record to a Transmission List 1. From the Air Client main screen, open a Transmission List. (For procedure details see To Open an Existing Playlist.) 2. From the Robust Database Search Results pane select/highlight a record or records. 3. Right click on the Search Results pane and from the popup menu select: Copy: To copy the highlighted record(s) to the clipboard. CopyAll: To copy all records in the Search Results pane to the clipboard. 4. Position the cursor on the list at the point the event or events are to be copied and paste the contents of the buffer to that location. (For procedure details see To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s).) To Drag & Drop a Record to a Transmission List 1. From the Air Client main screen, open a Transmission List or a Playlist. (For procedure details see To Open an Existing Playlist.) 2. From the Robust Database Search Results pane select/highlight a record or records (Single spots, A spots, and/or B spots). 3. Drag the selected content from the Robust Database Search window to the open playlist or transmission list. And Drop them to the desired location. Device Status Window The device status window allows you to check the connection status of devices assigned to a specific device server and provides other device information to help you identify the source of event errors. To Open the Device Status Window 1. From the main menu select Resources > Device Status. The Device Status window is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 130 of 288

131 Managing Resource Windows This window gives the status of all devices in control by the device server. The status bar displays the time of a device server. Time source originating from a PC is represented by the letter P. The letter T represents time from a timecode generator and the letter V for reference video. NDF and DF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For example, when drop frame is off, NDF displays in the status bar. The color of a device also signifies its status. By default, when a device is black, its status is normal and its events may be added to a playlist. Devices that are green are in use by a playlist in a transmission window. If a device is not connected or responding, the spot displays in red in the device status window. Device Status window columns can be reviewed for: Port: Specifies which port a device is connected to. The status of a disk port is displayed on one line for each head. When playing, one line displays the status of the on-air event and the other displays the status of the next spot to air. Device: (Device Name) Displays the device name and type when configured on the Device Server.. To open a VTR device s control panel, double-click the VTR in the device status window. The control panel only opens if the VTR contains a tape and is properly connected and configured. Status: Current status of the device. Status key words include: No dev: No device is connected to the specified port. No comm.: Air Client is unable to communicate with the specified device. Unthreaded: The device is not threaded. Cued: The device is cued. Play: The device is playing a spot. Standby: The device is in standby. Online: The device is online. Offline: The device is offline. Owner: Transmission list assignment of the device. Specifies which playlist or cache a device is assigned to. If the owner field is blank and you want to use the device, it must be configured in the device server. Pos: (Position) Transmission list event # location of the device. Displays the playlist position number of an event the device is playing Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 131 of 288

132 Managing Resource Windows Troubleshooting ID: Displays the ID of an event the device is playing. This is the current Id that is threaded in a particular device. Dur: (Duration). Specifies the duration of the cued or playing event associated with the device. This is the duration the device is currently scheduled to play the event. A device that is playing will be green and reflect the counting duration of the event. An A event would be counting down, while an AU event will be counting up. Information: Displays the input and output ports of a switcher, if applicable. If a switcher is connected to a device server, the information field displays the device status (online or offline), including general information. Certain devices (Switchers, Routers) may give extra information of device status. Troubleshoot transmission list problems (incorrect status of devices) by checking the Device Status window for problems with individual devices. If a device is not available or not communicating correctly, the text is red to indicate the situation. The status also reveals if the device is not communicating or there is not device currently connected. Note: A VTR's device control panel can be opened if the VTR is currently loaded with a tape. This is useful when device control is needed without looking for the event on the transmission list. Since all VTRs for all lists are shown here, ensure the correct VTR is selected. Device Storage Window The device storage window lists the media in a device connected to a specified server. When an event cannot be found, you can use the device storage window to verify that its information matches the spot ID on the device. Also, when creating or editing playlists, you can lookup spots on a device s media. You can search for a spot s ID or title and then drag it to a playlist window. Use the database, which is accessible on the right-click menu of the device storage window, to access a spot s record information. Cut Copy / Drag Drop to Playlist. Records can be copied and pasted or drag and dropped from this window into a play list or transmission list. Note on XDCAM Storage Locations: XDCAM cart, model A480, has 6 faces and each face has 80 bins, with up to 600 disk s loaded in the cart. A bin number with the first 2 digits specifying the face and the second 2 digits specifying the bin number allows an operator to know where in the cart the disk resides. Air Client displays this XDCAM storage information: the cart as a storage location with the cart face/slot number and disk label displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 132 of 288

133 Managing Resource Windows To Open the Device Storage Window This option will give a storage window view of the video server inventory. 1. From the main menu select Resources > Device Storage. The Choose Device dialog is displayed. 2. Select the target storage device to check the inventory and then click OK. The status bar displays the time of a device server. Time source originating from a PC is represented by the letter P. The letter T represents time from a timecode generator and the letter V for reference video. NDF and DF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For example, when drop frame is off, NDF displays in the status bar. The second tray in the status bar displays the number of spots on the device. The third tray displays the number of minutes used on a disk and the remaining available minutes. The last tray displays the device s status. The color of a spot also signifies its status. When a spot is black, its status is normal and may be added to a playlist. Spots that are green are in use by a playlist in a transmission window. On Sony cart machines, if a spot s title does not match its record in the database, the spot displays in red in the device storage window. Device Storage window columns can be reviewed for: Num: (Number) The number of the spot in the window. Spot ID: The ID of the media located in the device. Title: The title of the media located in the device. Duration: The spot s duration Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 133 of 288

134 Managing Resource Windows Spot #: Displays the spot number of the media which is assigned by the device. Play Date: The date the media was last played. Status: The media s status: normal (available for use), In Use (playing), Title Mismatch (for Sony cart machines only), Protect, and Searching (in progress searching the device). Total Available record space on the device The size of the largest contiguous recording available on the device. To Refresh a Window To refresh a display, right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Dynamic Display or press <F5> on the keyboard. This updates the content of the window. Protecting and Removing Spots Spots in a device storage window can be delete-protected in the device storage window to ensure they are not removed from the media. You can also remove spots so they are no longer available for air. To Remove a Record from the server 1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column. 2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Remove or press <Delete> on the keyboard. 3. The system prompts to confirm. Click OK to confirm. To Protect a Record 1. Highlight an event or range of events by clicking on its entry in the number column. 2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Protected. The record is protected and it s Status is set to P. (Protected events display a P in the Status column.) To Unprotect a Record 1. Highlight an event or range of events currently protected by clicking on its entry in the number column. 2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Unprotected. The record is unprotected and its Status is reset. To Check or Search for a record Note: A status panel in the Device Storage window blinks to indicate a search is in progress. This lets operators know during long searches that Air Client is functioning and not hung Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 134 of 288

135 Managing Resource Windows To Check a Record against the database 1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column. 2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Database. The database window opens with the comparison result. To Search for a Record by ID 1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column, right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Find ID. 2. Specify the search parameters: Find what: Enter the search string text - the ID or partial ID you wish to match. Note: The Find ID search only finds ID's if they begin with the string the user types in the 'Find What' field. Match whole word only: To match an ID exactly, select (check) the Match whole word only box. If you wish to match a partial ID, deselect (uncheck) the Match whole word only box. Match Case: If you wish to match the case (uppercase or lowercase) of the ID in the Find what: box, select (check) the Match Case box. Direction: To search through records above the record currently highlighted in the Device Storage window, click the Up radio button. To search through records below the currently highlighted record, click the Down button. 3. Click Find Next. If no matches are found, a warning indicates the contents of the Find what: box are not found. Click OK to dismiss this warning. If a matching record is found, it is highlighted in the Device Storage window. Clicking Find Next highlights each matching record, one at a time, until there are no more matching records. 4. When no additional matches are found, a warning is displayed, indicating that the contents of the Find what: box are not found. Click OK to dismiss this warning. 5. At any time, the user may: Change the configuration of the search and perform a new search by clicking the Find Next button. Click Cancel to dismiss the Find ID dialog Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 135 of 288

136 Managing Resource Windows To Search for a record by Title 1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column, right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Find Title. 2. Specify the search parameters: Find what: Enter the search string text - a complete or partial title you wish to match. Note: The Find Title search only finds the Title's if they begin with the string the user types in the 'Find What' field. Match whole word only: To match a Title exactly, select (check) the Match whole word only box. If you wish to match a partial Title, deselect (uncheck) the Match whole word only box. Match Case: If you wish to match the case (uppercase or lowercase) of the entry specified in the Find what: box, select (check) the Match Case box. Direction: To search through records above the record currently highlighted in the Device Storage window, click the Up radio button. To search through records below the currently highlighted record, click the Down button. 3. Click Find Next. If no matches are found, a warning indicates the contents of the Find what: box are not found. Click OK to dismiss this warning. If a matching record is found, it is highlighted in the Device Storage window. Clicking Find Next highlights each matching record, one at a time, until there are no more matching records. 4. When no additional matches are found, a warning is displayed, indicating that the contents of the Find what: box are not found. Click OK to dismiss this warning. 5. At any time, the user may: Change the configuration of the search and perform a new search by clicking the Find Next button. Click Cancel to dismiss the Find Title dialog. Moving Spots and Records to Playlists You can move a record, or multiple records, from the database or a device storage window to a playlist using drag-and-drop or Cut and Paste on the Edit menu. Move a record by dragging it from the database window and dropping it in a playlist Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 136 of 288

137 Managing Resource Windows You can also click a record, then from the main menu select Edit > Cut. Click the event in a playlist after which you want to insert the cut record, then from the main menu select Edit > Paste. Note: Dragging-and-dropping a multisegment record to a playlist opens a multisegment window. Multiple Records To move a range of multiple records, hold Shift and click the first record in the range, then click-hold the last record in the range. Drag the selection to a playlist and release the mouse button to drop it. Instead of dragging a selection range to a playlist, you can click Cut on the Edit menu, click the event after which you want to insert the range and click Paste on the Edit menu. More Info Window When the functionality has been purchased, this option allows the custom configuration of a More Info column using an ODBC database. The customer uses station-defined procedures to configure functionality on this display. More Info Windows display data from the automation database. Access to these fields depends upon the client they are being accessed from. In the Air Client, the objective of the More Info Window is to make available any information in a record by displaying it in a single window. This information can be the data captured using the Media Client, as well as what currently exists in the database. In Air Client, they display not only the standard fields found in both the ASDB and the ASSEG tables, but also any fields that are added to the database, normally in the ASEXT table. For information on setting up the More Info Window see Configuring System Properties: More Info. To Display the More Info Window To display the More Info window of an ID in Air Client: Double-click the event number on a play list or transmission list window. Note: Double-clicking anywhere else on an event line will result in an undesired action to occur or initiate another feature of Air Client. OR Within the Play List Window, right click and then from the pop-up menu select Show MoreInfo. Example Window When the event number is selected, the data associated with the material ID is displayed in the More Info window. The following is an example window. Yours may be defined differently Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 137 of 288

138 Managing Resource Windows Video Window Air Client can include an optional feature that displays the on-air event in a video window. A video board installed in the Air Client workstation must be connected to the output from the on-air video stream. To Display the Video Window When this feature is available, from the main menu select Tools > Video Window Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 138 of 288

139 Managing Compile Lists Managing Compile Lists About the Compiler Option The compiler is an optional feature of Air Client that allows you to create groups of spots, or pods, to play to air. Compiling spots into pods allows you to air multiple commercial breaks from one device instead of playing spots from multiple devices. Each pod in a playlist plays as a single event and is identified by the compile tape ID. The compile list window is used to create pods and edit its spots. Editing spots when the pod is loaded in a transmission window may cause unexpected results. You can also play spots from the compile list window, allowing you to assess the air quality of the media. List Filename Character Limits Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst &.cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters. Creating a Compile List A compile list is created identically to a playlist in a playlist window. Typically this is a log from traffic that contains segments and also commercial "breaks" (NOT Break Events). The idea is to compile in a tape only the commercial breaks. 1. To open a compile list window, form the main menu select Resources > View List... The Choose List dialog is displayed. 2. Select a compile list from the Choose List dialog, and then click OK. 3. In the TYPE column, remove "A" values from those segments you do not want to compile (leaving the type blank). The compiler will copy the commercials into a tape and every 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 139 of 288

140 Managing Compile Lists time it finds an event in the list that has a blank type, it leaves few seconds of black (configurable) between the previous commercial break and the next one. To view the individual spots of a compile tape In a compile list window, you can view the individual spots of a compile tape by using the append, load and insert list menu options on the right-click menu. To remove all spots from a compile list window To remove all spots from a compile list window, point to Compiler on the right-click menu, then click Clear List. To prepare a list for compiling Also, you can use the compile list window to prepare a list for compiling by performing these tasks: 1. Insert a Secondary Event Compile ID at the top of the compile list to indicate where the compiler begins compiling the list. Air Client automatically switches to Revise Mode. 2. Enter an ID in the ID field of the Secondary Event Compile ID. This is the compile tape ID number that will display in the ID field of a playlist when the compiled events are inserted. Each tape containing a compile list must have a compile tape ID number and is used to identify all of the spots on the tape in a playlist. 3. Insert spots into the compile list. 4. In the TYPE column, remove "A" values from those segments you do not want to compile (leaving the type blank). The compiler will copy the commercials into a tape and every time it finds an event in the list that has a blank type, it leaves few seconds of black (configurable) between the previous commercial break and the next one. 5. At the end of the compile list, insert a secondary break event or enter Revise Mode (ALT + R) and remove letter A from the Type field of the last event to indicated the end of the compile list. Note: Events are compiled according to the value in the Type field. Remove A from the Type field to indicate which events you do not want to compile. Only events containing A in the Type field are compiled. Compiling a Compile List After creating a compile list, use the compiler s control panel to compile its spots on one tape. 1. Right-click the compile list window and from the popup menu select Compiler > Panel. This opens the Compiler control panel Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 140 of 288

141 Managing Compile Lists 2. Select the button function to perform. A description of the function of each button on the compiler control panel follows: Compile: The Compile button begins the compile process, beginning with the first pod. This feature will only compile one pod at a time, stopping at each break event allowing you time to insert another tape. Auto: The Auto button also begins the compile process, except that the compiler compiles as many pods as will fit on a single tape. The compiler will not stop at each break event; however, each compiled pod remains separated by their secondary compile ID and break events. Cue One: The Cue One button cues the tape to the SOM position of a selected event, allowing you to preview it. Cue Up: The Cue Up button cues the record tape to the pod s SOM, allowing you to preview an entire compiled list. Replay: The Replay button plays a pod or event that is cued by the Cue Up and Cue One buttons. You cannot replay lists or events until they are cued with either the Cue One or Cue Up buttons. Cancel: Use the Cancel button to abort the compile process. You must recompile the list after clicking this button. 3. During the compile process information is displayed in the Record Device Status field and the Compiler Error field: The Record Device Status field displays the status of the compile list s record device. When compiling, messages appear in the record device status field indicating the status of the compile process. Following is a description of each status message: Cueing. When the compile process begins, the recordable material cues and the source material cues and threads. Prerolling Compiler. When the compiler is cued, the source device is in preroll and is advancing to the SOM of an event. Compiling. Displays as the compiler is compiling events. Saving List. Displays when the compiler saves a compile list. Waiting to Restart. After the compiler saves a compile list, this message displays until the compiler is restarted after it stops between break events. Note: This is only applicable when compiling in Auto mode Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 141 of 288

142 Managing Compile Lists Canceling. When the compile process is canceled, this message displays until the recorders stop. Waiting for User. When an error message is displayed in a dialog box, this message displays until you close the dialog box. The Compiler Error field displays any errors that occur during the compile process. When the compiler encounters an error, it displays the error in the compiler error field on the control panel. Following is a description of each error: No recorders or recorders not threaded. Either no record devices are assigned to the compiler or there is no recordable media in the devices. Recorders are still moving. This error displays if the recorders are still moving when the compile process is initiated. Unable to thread and/or cue. Either the recorders did not cue or the first event in the compile list did not cue or thread. Operation canceled by user. Displays when the compile process is canceled. Compile tape mismatch. The compiler tape ID for the compile list does not match the ID in the record device. Encountered end of usable tape. No more recordable media is available for the compiler to record events on. Unable to locate compilable event. There are no events in the compile list to be compiled. Compiler skipped break/pod. The compiler skipped a break event or pod because of a missing media error. Record ID has changed. The compiler detected a different compile tape ID in the compile list than that in the record device. A dialog box appears, allowing you to confirm that you changed the tape in the device. 4. When a list is compiled, the file is saved with a.cpl extension, instead of the.lst extension. Recompiling a Compile List If you cancel the compile process before the entire list is compiled, or you want to insert another spot in a list that has already been compiled, you must recompile the entire list before playing on-air. Before recompiling the list, however, you must first mark the compiled spots as uncompiled by pointing to Compiler on the right-click menu and clicking Clear Compile Events. Other Compile List Functions The following functions are optional and may not be available on your Air Client workstation. Jam New IDs Jam New IDs marks a point on a compile list from which to create a Sectional List. A sectional list is a compile list that is recompiled with a new ID and saved with the extension.sec. It is identical to the original compile list, except that it contains only the timecode of the original list and not the events Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 142 of 288

143 Managing Compile Lists A sectional list is used to play regional spots in place of the spots recorded in the compile list. Both the sectional list and the compile list must be loaded in separate transmission list windows before aired. To broadcast the sectional list, the compile and sectional list must be played simultaneously. The compiled list references the sectional list to determine when its spots air. When the spots of a sectional list air, the compile list plays normally; however, in some broadcast regions, compile list spots will be substituted by spots in the sectional list. Mark Exception Mark Exception marks an event in a compiled list as an event to recompile into a sectional list. To create the sectional list, you must change the event ID of all of the events that you have marked as exceptions to another ID. The sectional list is created to play regional spots in place of national spots, so, the ID replacing the original compile ID should be the ID of the regional spot. Spots that are marked as exceptions will have the letter X next to letter A in the Type field of the compile list. These spots are recompiled with the regional spots in place of the national spots. When the sectional list is loaded into a transmission list window, all spots not marked as exceptions are ignored by Air Client. When a sectional list is compiled, the timecode from the original compile list will be transferred on a new tape with the marked exceptions. Thread Into VTR Use this option to specify the VTR in a cart machine to thread the source tape into Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 143 of 288

144 Error Management Error Management About Displaying Errors To simultaneously view all Air Client errors in a separate window, click Display Errors on the File menu. From the Choose Server dialog box, click a server whose errors you want to view and click OK. An Error Log window displays all errors occurring for the server you selected. To View Error Logs To view error logs saved as text files, from the main menu select File > Open Text..., and then choose a file you want to view. To Display Errors 1. From the Main menu select File > Display Errors. An error display will appear with the most recent errors. 2. To clear these errors, from the Main menu select File > Clear Errors. Note: This does not clear errors saved in the error log. The errors display is only a clipboard of errors since the last time the errors were cleared Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 144 of 288

145 Error Management Clearing Error Messages from the Air Client Desktop Error messages are displayed in the status bar of the Air Client desktop. To Clear Error Messages 1. Clear any error message by pressing <F4>, or clicking the F4 button located in the lower right corner of the display. 2. If there is more than one error message, press <F4> to clear the next message displayed after the previous one. 3. The last error message displays in black, instead of red, after pressing <F4>. To remove this last message from the desktop, from the main menu select File > Clear Errors. List Validation The list validation option checks through the list of events for potential problems and lists the events, and their errors. Sequence: (sequence = missing segments within a series, or segments out of order) The segment number is out of sequence for the same tape ID in the list, denoted with sequence in the error type field. SameSeg: (same segment = same segment number back-to-back) The segment number is followed by same segment number for the same tape ID in the list, denoted with sameseg in the error type field. Separates: (separates = segments not separated by a break) The segments are not separated by a break, denoted with separates in the error type field. SameID: (same id = same ID back-to-back) The ID is followed by same ID in the list, denoted with sameid in the error type field. Note: The error type for each event is a warning only. All events will play Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 145 of 288

146 Error Management List Validation window The error type for each event in a List Validation window is a warning only. The operator should check the events listed to ensure proper playback. 1. While viewing list, from the main menu select Events > List Validation. The list validation info dialog appears listing any errors. If no info box appears this indicates the Air Client was not able to find any errors within the transmission list based on the described error criteria above. 2. (Option) To save the list to a textfile, click Save. A Save As Text dialog is displayed requiring the operator to specify a file name and then click Save. 3. (Option) To print the list, click Print. A Print dialog is displayed, requiring the operator to specify a printer (if other than default) and then click OK to print. 4. Click Close to close the List Validation dialog Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 146 of 288

147 Emergency Operations Emergency Operations Main/Backup Changeover (FOR NON-CLONING STATIONS) Changeover Indications: 1. The screen freezes up (Countdown of current event, and clock displayed in lower left corner will stop moving). 2. A pop-up warning message appears indicating the main Device Server has aborted operation. Click Yes, to use the alternate Device Server. Recovery Steps 1. Always try RETRY first, maybe your client just lost connection and the Device Server is actually still OK (you can also confirm this by checking for the same error status on other nearby clients) **If RETRY fails, wait before you answer YES to USE ALTERNATE Note the time that WAS left on your current event, and/or the start time indicated on the auto ripple next to the next event. Note this time, and how much time is roughly left. **BEFORE PERFORMING STEPS 2 and 3** 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 147 of 288

148 Emergency Operations Ensure the BACKUP Device Server is actually on, and the application is running. If a co-worker can help with this step that would be a good idea, since you will have limited time to complete these steps. If you re in a TAPE EVENT you must put the deck into LOCAL and leave it in LOCAL FOR THE REST OF THAT EVENT. 2. Throw the MAIN/BACKUP transfer switch (usually in racks by the Device Servers themselves) this will give control of all your devices over to the BACKUP Device Server. This is also a step you may want to get a co-worker to do while you look after the Air Client side. 3. Answer YES to the MAIN Aborted Use alternate prompt. 4. Look at the top of the windows bar for MAIN to change to BACKUP, you may see an hourglass during this time, about 30 seconds. 5. After a successful connection to the BACKUP, you should be prompted to Load transmission lists on the alternate Device Server click YES to do so. [This only happens if you re configured for Auto List Save, and it is best if ONE CLIENT is set up to do this for all playlists] PLEASE NOTE: When the client logs in to BACKUP, the Transmission lists will NOT NECESSARILY open for viewing (though they are indeed already loaded if Reload prompt above was chosen). Remember to use VIEW LIST option (from shortcut button, or from Resources/View List) to see the active transmission list(s). You should discover them already loaded at this point if you had answered YES to step 4. You may need to delete a few events to get up to the current event. Delete UP TO AND INCLUDING on-air event. Your list had already started the current event (which is now already in progress playing out of the Disk [or VTR in LOCAL]) so its line item needs to be removed from the list. 6. At this point your client should be logged into BACKUP and your list should be loaded and parked on the next-needed event. Your events should now be blue and ready to cue and roll. DO NOT hit PGM RUN, and DO NOT CUE EVENTS at this point. If you are on server-based content (file trailing on for remainder of on-air event) an early cue command will stop your on-air event and you will be in black Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 148 of 288

149 Emergency Operations If you re in a tape based event, leave it in LOCAL. Switching to remote will cause the tape to register and cue to subsequent segments or eject, both scenarios will take you off the air, so keep it in LOCAL until the segment has ended. 7. To resume automated playout, you can either place a hard start on the first spot in the break, or wait for the end of the still-playing current on-air file, then (at the fade to black) hit PGM RUN, to cue, then ROLL (or PLAY). REMEMBER: If you are using an LCP-20 Control Panel or an Operator Control Panel (OCP), it will not be lit up (usable) initially so you will need to use the software panel to roll the list at first. Other Considerations Video server ports that are set to Stop Disk Play/Record on Init will reset to black, thus stopping your on-air event when the transfer switch is thrown. If you want the option to be able to failover and have the current file stay on the air during the failover process, ensure at least one of the ports in a given set (the AIR or the PROTECT [or both]) are set so they do NOT Stop Disk Play/Record on Init. System Power Up and Down Sequences ADC Automation System components power up sequence is performed in reverse order to their Power down sequence. Power Up Sequence Power Down Sequence 1 st File Server 1 st Devices** 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 149 of 288

150 Emergency Operations Power Up Sequence Power Down Sequence 2 nd Device Server 2 nd Clients(s) 3 rd B/U Device Server 3 rd B/U Device Server 4 th Clients(s) 4 th Device Server 5 th Devices** 5 th File Server **Note: Only applies when powering up or down of device is required Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 150 of 288

151 Automated Recording Automated Recording Record Lists The ADC provides features for automating the recording of taped and live events. The material you record can come from any source network/satellite feed, studio, or tape. With AutoSat: Record Lists are created by AutoSat. Your Record Schedules are entered into AutoSat. AutoSat tunes in your feeds, and schedules the events to record on the ADC Record List(s). Without AutoSat: Setting up for timed recordings is similar to preparing for event playout. You first create a list of Record events, manually or through a traffic system, and save the list as a.lst file. You will need to load or append this list into your Record List(s) on your ADC on a daily basis. Key Elements The following is an example of a Record List. your Record List, insert Primary events as needed with the following information: In TIME: Enter the time of day you want to start the recording. (Most lists run off a 24hr. clock.) If recording to Video Servers only, and two or more events start at the same time you need to insert the additional record events on a second record list. (Record lists, like VTRs can only record one event at a time.) To avoid clipping the beginning of a program adjust the start time to allow: 15 sec. of pad. If you could have more than one record event start at the same time if you were using a VTR and Video Disk or Multiple VTRs then these events may be inserted on the same record list Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 151 of 288

152 Automated Recording TYPE: Enter an R (Record) for the type of event. The Record event is a timed, hard start Event. ID: If Recording to Tape Enter the ID number for the specific program. Use the same number that the show will be prepped and play back as later. The Record List will automatically stripe the tape with the User Bit ID throughout. (Note: IDs should be No more than 8 characters in length.) If Recording to Disk A different ID number can be used than what the show will play back as. This is to ensure that an un-prepped show may not accidentally air. The ID number can be renamed at Media Client at prep time. (Note: Not all video disks support rename. If your facility is using the reject blank SOM option, this may help ensure the incorrect show does not air. Title: If the Record device receives input from a router/switcher, enter the name of the input source here. Use the pre-configured source name on the Device Server. A User-friendly title can also be inserted in the TITLE FIELD following the router command in the following manner; SAT3;Show Monday the routing command first, then a semi-colon, then your user title. *If nothing is entered for the title, and the Record device is connected to a router, the ADC uses the A/V channel information to determine the input crosspoint. The result of this being either recording black or the last source that was routed to this device. Dur: (Duration) Enter the duration of the Record event for the duration you want to record for. Remember to take into account that you may need to start the next recording and that this recording may have started early. SOM: Certain videodisks will require an SOM (Start Of Message) value. Running the Record List 1. Load or Append the Record List file (.LST file) into a designated Record List window. Note: If using AutoSat this will happen automatically. 2. The ADC looks for the Record device that has the specific ID d event. If using an external VTR, insert the tape using a Wand, or a Barcode event. This is done to validate the event on the list. Remember to rewind after a tape. If using a videodisk, the videodisk must be properly connected and running. A videodisk must be properly configured. (In most cases this will be pre-configured.) 3. If devices are ready, and all Record events in the list are valid, recording begins at the designated time for each event. (Note: So as not to clip recordings, make sure at least: 15sec of pad is provided for the start time and the duration of the file. Record List Tips/Troubleshooting DO NOT load/include more than 24-hrs worth of events on one Record List at one time. (Record lists do NOT recognize dates, only a 24hr clock.) Make sure SOM fields contain a value (Applies to certain Video Disks only) You can only have one Disk port assigned to one list at one time, therefore disk recordings cannot be simultaneous and may not overlap on one list Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 152 of 288

153 Automated Recording Secondary Records Recording of live shows for time delayed playout requires an optional ADC feature. This Live Record option provides a Secondary Record event to the standard ADC system. Unlike timed recordings, live recordings designed for delayed playout use one list for both the recording, and subsequent playback of the events. i.e. The On-Air Playlist. Key Elements The following is an example of a playlist with a Secondary Record event attached. Inputting Secondary Record Events A Secondary Record event can be inserted into a playlist two ways Manually - using the pull-down menus: Events > Insert Secondary > Secondary Record. Or Shift-Insert, then select Secondary Record from the list. Traffic Log - events can be entered in advance by Traffic. Secondary Record Entry Guidelines The ID and Segment Number on the Secondary Record Event should match the requested replay event s ID and Segment Number. The duration does not have to exactly match the TRT of the program, the duration MUST be AT LEAST the TRT of the program and the duration for each secondary record event must match one another exactly. Make sure the Time of Day field is blank (not zeros/no value) Make sure the record tape is put into a VTR before the live program is to be played and recorded. Basic Functions of the Secondary Record A Secondary Record event records the Primary event that it is attached to. When the system starts to play the first segment of the live event, the Record event is started. When the operator comes out of an up counting live event [into break] using the PLAY button on the list Control Panel, the Record event for that live event will be marked done. At that time, the replay event down the list will be filled in with the SOM and Duration of the recorded event ready for replay. The Title field from the SECONDARY RECORD event is also copied at the replay event line. The recording tape will not be stopped but will be moved down to the next SECONDARY RECORD with the same ID [for subsequent segments], where the recording continues until the show is completed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 153 of 288

154 Automated Recording Once the Secondary Record is completed, the ID and Segment information could be saved to the database (if configured) Secondary Recording to Video Disk When inserting SECONDARY RECORD events, make sure that the Time of Day field is BLANK. DO NOT put in zeros, only blanks. Set the SOM field of each SECONDARY RECORD event to 00:00: The videodisk port doing the recording must be properly configured or the recording will not be made correctly. The following disk parameters must be set: Enable Recording of Record Event Enable Segment Play/Record with ID (Modify Segment IDs must equal zero) Back to Back Record must be disabled Make sure that the videodisk port is assigned to the list before the recording is to be done. Videodisks require the use of a unique ID for each individual event that is recorded. See your videodisks documentation for system requirements. Secondary Recording to Tape Tapes MUST BE pre-striped with Time Code when used for Secondary Records. It is best to use the Media Client s Black Tapes feature, to stripe the tapes, so as to Record the tape s ID and Userbits as well. Putting userbits on the tape will allow the tape to be inserted into a VTR before use and automatically be recognized by the ADC as the Record tape. An SOM on the Record event is needed because an insert edit Record is used instead of a hard Record. This ensures that the tape will be started using synchronized play to enable it to Record at the specified first frame for frame accurate playback. Enter the SOM in all the Secondary Record events using the same SOM value. Make sure that the Time of Day field is BLANK in the SECONDARY RECORD event. DO NOT put in zeros, only blanks. This field is used to store additional information about the recording while the recording is taking place. The commercial spaces between the live events are also being recorded on your tape, but because there are no SECONDARY RECORD events attached to them, the information is not saved and records black. When the last live event is finished, the last Record event will also be finished. At that time the recording will also stop. If that tape is needed anywhere within the Lookahead, the tape will stay in the deck and cue for playback. When it plays, it will play for the duration that was determined by the SECONDARY RECORD event. When using this event to replay segments, remember that when the tape is finished recording, it will have to be rewound for playback. If the replay program immediately follows the end of the live program, then the tape may not cue in time. If this scenario exists, then two record tapes should be used and IDs on both tapes should match exactly Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 154 of 288

155 Automated Recording Database Logging When a SECONDARY RECORD event is finished recording, all subsequent replay events on the list are automatically filled in with the recorded duration and SOM. If any other lists on the same Automation Server contain the same replay events, they will be filled in also. Enable As Run/Update Database must be set up for your Secondary Record files to be stored permanently in the Media Client Database. This is only necessary if you need to permanently store your Secondary Record files for future replay beyond the current log. You should only use this option if the previous scenarios apply to your station. This must only be configured on one Air Client. To activate this option WARNING: This option can only be enabled in one air client...having multiple air clients will generate a CURSOR SQL error. 1. From the main menu select Properties > AsRun Logs 2. On the As Run configuration tab, select Update Database to allow secondary recorded Id s to be saved to the database with the timecode and segment information Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 155 of 288

156 Barcode Event Barcode Event Introduction A Barcode Event is the process of loading a VTR with a tape that will be needed for use by a specific ON-AIR Transmission Playlist. When would you need a Barcode Event? There are three scenarios where a Barcode Event is useful: There is not enough time to record the media into the video server and it must air off of a VTR machine. A Cart Machine or Video Server crash and a backup/contingency reel needs to air off of a VTR machine. The ingested copy of the show has been purged from the Video Servers and is now not available to the ON-AIR Playlist. Will ADC run this Barcode Event automated? Yes. The event on the playlist that will run out of a VTR machine will run in a similar manner to an event that runs from a video server. The only difference is the VTR being used will switch to air when the ON-AIR Playlist plays the event instead of the video server. Will a Barcode Event appear on the playlist differently? No. The event was the same event that was originally appended to the list. The device column will show the correct device being used. In this case the specific VTR device name as it appears in the Device Status window Device column. How do I actually load a Barcode Event? The following pages will show the correct procedures to load a Barcode Event as well as some of the different scenarios related to barcode events. Preparing the list for a Barcode Event if the ID exists on a Video Server? If a show was ingested incorrectly or there is a bad copy on the Video Server the ID must be deleted or changed on the playlist and then purged off both the Primary Video Server and the Protect Video Server (if available). You would then re-insert the ID back into the playlist when it will need to play Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 156 of 288

157 Barcode Event VTR Playlist Assignment VTR as Assigned Device When a VTR is assigned to a playlist that VTR will be available to that playlist when a tape is loaded and a barcode event is executed. A barcode event is an option in the automation to designate to the automation that media will play from a specific VTR. The fact that the VTR is assigned to the playlist ensures the VTR is only used for the specific playlist it is assigned to. Other playlists will not have access to this tape machine. The window on the right shows VTR1 is currently assigned to a specific Playlist as shown in the Owner column. VTR as a Floater Machine A Floater Machine is a VTR that is unassigned to any of the playlists. This Floater Machine can be used by any of the playlists on the Device Server it is controlled by as long as the Audio/Video configurations are set up for the ON-AIR playlist that will use the VTR for ON-AIR playback. The window on the right shows VTR1 is unassigned to any specific playlist. The owner column for this machine is blank. When a barcode event is performed, the owner column will fill in with the correct list. If attempting to perform a barcode event and the owner column in the Device Status window shows that the VTR is currently assigned to another list, call an engineer Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 157 of 288

158 Barcode Event Barcode Event Step by Step 1. Select correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 158 of 288

159 Barcode Event 2. Insert tape into a tape machine that is not assigned to the Media List. Place VTR in Local mode. 3. Set the Audio/Video levels. 4. Click the event on the transmission list that was loaded into the VTR, Right Click on transmission list, select Barcode Event in the right click options menu. 5. Put VTR into REMOTE. The event on the playlist should turn blue, cue to the correct timecode in the events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode. 6. The event will play from the VTR at the scheduled time. If the tape does not have timecode in the SOM column it will go to a STOP status and play when it receives the Play command from the Playlist at current location on the tape. To control tape manually through the automation double click on the event that is loaded into the VTR and a DEVICE CONTROL PANEL will open up. This will allow standard VTR control, including play, rewind, forward, and CUE which could be used to QC and CUE prior to air. If control of the VTR is initiated with this panel make sure to hit the CUE button prior to airtime (Only if there is timecode) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 159 of 288

160 Barcode Event Barcode Event Scenarios The following pages discuss several different examples of inserting and playing a barcode event. A barcode event is an option in the Playlist-Right Click Options Menu. This is one easy way to load a tape and have the automation control it with the transmission list. Follow the steps to do a barcode event. Before being able to do a barcode event the ID being used cannot be located in a Video Server or a Cart Machine assigned to the playlist. Scenario 1: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has an automation database record 1. Select correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event. 2. Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is an unassigned (floater) machine. 3. Set audio/video levels as appropriate 4. Click the event on the transmission list that corresponds to the tape that was loaded into the VTR, then right click on this event, and from the popup menu select Barcode Event. 5. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, cue to the correct timecode in the events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode. Scenario 2: Using Barcode Event for a tape that does not have an automation database record (Manually entering SOM) 1. Select correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event. 2. Manually revise event line using Alt+R to enter/change any information necessary (in this example entering the SOM of the tape in the SOM field is needed to allow the tape to cue to it s correct position) Alt+R again to exit the revise mode Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 160 of 288

161 Barcode Event 3. Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is an unassigned (floater) machine. 4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate 5. Click the event on the transmission list that corresponds to the tape that was loaded into the VTR, then right click on this event and from the popup menu select Barcode Event. 6. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, cue to the correct timecode in the events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode. Scenario 3: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has bad or no timecode 1. Select correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event. 2. Click <Alt+R> to set Revise mode. Then manually revise event line to enter/change any information necessary (in this example the SOM field should be left blank <not zeros> to ensure that the automation will not try to cue up to any TC location on the tape) 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 161 of 288

162 Barcode Event 3. Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is an unassigned (floater) machine. 4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate 5. With machine still in local, cue the tape up to it s in point and then back the tape up to it s appropriate pre-roll position 6. Click the event on the transmission list that corresponds to the tape that was loaded into the VTR, then right click on this event, and from the popup menu select Barcode Event. 7. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, however, the VTR will remain in STOP mode and will not shuttle to any TC location because the SOM field is blank. Automation will play event at the scheduled time. If the SOM is not entered on the playlist the VTR will stay in a STOP status and play when it receives the Play command from the Playlist. Therefore, it is important to remember to manually back the tape up to account for preroll. It is only when the SOM does exist on the Playlist (either from the database or manually entered) that the automation will cue to the correct position on the tape (list preroll value). To control tape manually through the automation double click on the event that is loaded into the VTR and a DEVICE CONTROL PANEL will open up Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 162 of 288

163 Barcode Event Note: In order for the Device Control Panel to be accessed, you must double click on a VTR event that has status in it s status column. Clicking anywhere else will result in the opening of the Playlist Control Panel which controls the ON-AIR Playlist!) This will allow standard VTR control, including play, rewind, forward, and CUE which could be used to QC and CUE prior to air. If control of the VTR is initiated with this panel make sure to hit the CUE button prior to airtime (Only if there is an SOM entered). You may also access this Device Control Panel by right clicking on the VTR event. Warning: The event will need to be re-barcoded if there is no SOM and manual control is taken Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 163 of 288

164 Logging Logging Error Logs Errors that occur during the use of ADC are displayed in the error window at the bottom of the playlist. An error log is created for each 24-hour day and covers the period from midnight to 23:59:59. To Display an Error Log 1. From the main menu select File > Open Text. 2. Error logs are typically located in the Lists\Asruns directory or in the Lists\Errors directory*. (*The directory of the Error logs is configured in Properties/Errors...) 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 164 of 288

165 Logging 3. Files of type: Select Errors (*.err). 4. Highlight the error file you wish to read, and then click Open. The Text Browser dialog opens with the selected file displayed. Asrun Logs Events that playback during the use of ADC are displayed in the Asrun Log. An Asrun Log is created for each 24-hour day and covers the specified period as configured in Properties/Asrun Logs Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 165 of 288

166 Logging To Display Asrun Logs 1. From the main menu select File > Open Text. 2. Select the correct folder. Asrun logs are located in the Lists\Asruns directory. Each transmission list may also be separated into different folders. (This may be different at you facility if the Asrun logs are placed in a different location) 3. Files of type: Select Text Files (*.txt). 4. Highlight the error file you wish to read, and then click Open. The Text Browser dialog opens with the selected file displayed. 5. The Log can be checked for time played, missed events, skipped events, reconcile codes, playout device, etc Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 166 of 288

167 WinCmms WinCmms About Traffic Translator The Traffic Translator is a stand alone application that can be run from any of the automation s clients or from any computer s desk top. It is a custom created application tailored to the unique requirements of each customer and is designed so that both primary and secondary events can be generated from the traffic log. In a typical automation environment the Traffic Translator supports a flat file interchange workflow between the Traffic and Automation systems. In this workflow the Traffic System exports schedule files and they are translated into automation playlist files using the Traffic Translator application. The translated lists are then loaded into the automaton system for onair playout. Using the Translator Program WinCmms is the traffic log translation program that will translate a log from traffic into a.lst file. This.LST file will then be available for the operator to append the.lst into the transmission list. It will explain how to build a new playlist. 1. Launch WinCmms shortcut on desktop. 2. On the Welcome screen, click Next 3. (If the log is on a floppy disk, insert the disk into the floppy drive) 4. Select the A:\ drive if not already selected. 5. If the traffic log is not a txt file, select All Files to view the contents of the floppy. 6. Select the desired list to translate, and then select Next. 7. Select the destination for the translated playlist file, and then select Next. 8. Confirm the Input info and the Output info is correct. 9. Select Translate. When the translation is complete, select Finish Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 167 of 288

168 WinCmms WinCmms Setup To Install WinCmms Follow directions on install readme file to copy the wincmms.exe file the WinCMMS directory on the local PC. To Put a Shortcut on the Desktop Tips 1. Using Microsoft Windows Explorer, locate the WinCMMS directory. 2. Click the wincmms.exe file. 3. On the File menu, click Create Shortcut. 4. Drag the shortcut icon onto the desktop. To change any settings for the shortcut, such as its name, what key combination is used to access it, use your right mouse button to click the shortcut, and then click Properties. To delete a shortcut, drag it to the Recycle Bin. The original item will still exist on the disk where it is stored. To Change the Default Directories and Options 1. Use your right mouse button to click the WinCMMS shortcut on the desktop, and then click Properties. 2. On the Properties window. Click on the Shortcut tab. 3. Add the following parameters, separated by a space, to the Target text box: <input_directory\[input_file]> or <input_directory\[default_extension]> <output_directory> [-axy] [<done_directory>] Where: <input_directory>: Points to the default input directory. Where the traffic logs are located. Could be accompanied by a [input_file] name. This is useful when calling the translator from another application. The translator closes itself after the file is converted. OR Could be accompanied by a [default_extension] Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 168 of 288

169 WinCmms <output_directory>: Points to the default output directory. Where the output playlist will be saved. -a: Allows the translator to run in Automatic Mode. The Translator will run minimized converting all the files located in the <input_directory>. After each log is translated is moved to the <done_directory>. If there is no <done_directory> specified, will traffic log will be moved to the <output_directory>. The Translator stays open until a new file(s) is (are)downloaded to the <input_directory>. -x: Allows the translator to run in Batch Mode. The Translator will convert all the files located in the <input_directory>. It closes itself after the last file is converted. Not to be used in conjunction with the a switch. -y: Allows the translator to run without prompt. Will overwrite the output file, if exists. Can be used in conjunction with the a or x switch. Examples: c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe a:\ e:\playlist c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic\today.txt e:\playlist -y c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic\*.scd e:\playlist -xy c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic e:\playlist -ay e:\traffic\done 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 169 of 288

170 Global Media Transfer (GMT) Global Media Transfer (GMT) GMT Overview GMT or Global Media Transfer is the Automation s system for controlling the movement of media/material. This process can be used to move material a few feet within a facility or thousands of miles between facilities. GMT is a part of the On-Air automation system. Each transmission list may ask GMT to find media that cannot be found in the devices assigned to the list. GMT will then find and move the media to a destination device, usually a videodisk server, assigned to the transmission list. The transmission list can then air this media. GMT can also be used in conjunction with the Media Client to send and retrieve material from an archive device. Purchase Note: GMT is a for-purchase option to ADC systems. Contact your Automation Sales representative for details. Reference Note: For more information reference the ADC GMT Configuration and Operations Guide document. The main tasks of GMT are: Find media/material needed by an on-air transmission list or find material requested by a Media Client. Copy that media to its intended destination. This may be a videodisk server serving a transmission list or an archive device. Monitor the movement of material. With As-run logging, log the movement of material. Provide automatic media duplication on multiple videodisk servers for air protection. GMT Transfer Modes GMT supports four transfer modes or mechanisms for copying media: fibrechannel transfers, baseband transfers, archive transfers and wide-area network FTP transfers. Fibrechannel transfers Media may be copied among video servers linked by a fibrechannel connection. Fibrechannel transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and occur faster than real time. Fibrechannel transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple Device Servers. Archive transfers Media may be copied to or from an archive device either by the normal background GMT process, or manually through the Media Client application. Archive transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and occur faster than real time. Archive transfers may be single-hop or double-hop transfers. Singlehop transfers copy the media from the archive directly to the requesting playout video server. Double-hop transfers copy the media from the archive to an intermediate video 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 170 of 288

171 Global Media Transfer (GMT) server, and then execute a fibrechannel transfer from the intermediate video server to the requesting playout video server. Archive transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple Device Servers. Baseband transfers Media may be copied from a baseband source device, such as a cart machine, VTR or a video server s decoder port, to a video server s encoder port. Baseband transfers are real-time transfers. Audio and video are automatically routed from the source device to the destination device according to the A/V routing tables configured for the GMT list. Baseband transfers may be single-hop or double-hop transfers. Single-hop transfers copy the media from the source device directly to the requesting playout video server. Double-hop transfers copy the media from the source device to an intermediate video server, and then execute a fibrechannel transfer from the intermediate video server to the requesting playout video server. Baseband transfers may only occur between devices controlled by a single Device Server. Only the fibrechannel hop of double-hop baseband transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple Device Servers. WAN FTP transfers Media may be copied among video servers using the video server s native FTP transfer mechanism. This may be accomplished on a local-area or wide-area network. FTP transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and may occur faster than real time, depending on the bandwidth available on the widearea network. Only the local video server, designated as the site manager, need be controlled by a Device Server. GMT Components GMT consists of three fundamental components: Requesters, Distributors and GMT lists. Requesters are virtual media devices assigned to a Transmission list and associated with destination devices (playout video servers). Media that is not available in the Requester s destination device is requested from a Distributor (or Distributors) associated with source devices. Requests are made when events enter the lookahead of a Transmission list and cannot be registered with any of the physical media devices assigned to that list. Distributors are virtual media devices assigned to a GMT list and associated with source devices. These source devices may be video server ports, cart machines, VTRs, archives or ProxyFTP devices. Distributors create and run events on the GMT list to accomplish the transfer of media to the requesting destination device. A single distributor can only support a single transfer mode, depending on the type of its associated source device, but may be pointed to or linked with other Distributors supporting other transfer modes. By chaining Distributors in this manner, search paths may be created to pass requests through a number of Distributors of different types. The first Distributor whose source device contains the requested media will execute a transfer - of that Distributor s type - to the Requester s destination device. GMT Lists are modified Transmission lists used exclusively by GMT. Distributors assigned to the GMT list will create events to execute transfers of one type or another. Non-real-time transfers (fibrechannel, archive and WAN FTP) are executed by events registered and run by the Distributors. Baseband transfers are created by Distributors but run by the physical media devices assigned to the GMT list. (OPTION) Push Lists are simply Transmission Lists used for a specific purpose other than on-air playout. Push Lists are used to push media from a source device to a destination device ahead of time. Under normal circumstances, Requesters request missing media at roughly the same rate as events enter the lookahead of the requesting 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 171 of 288

172 Global Media Transfer (GMT) Transmission List. GMT is driven by the Transmission List and will fulfill requests for missing media as events undergo the registration process. A Push List allows GMT to move ( push ) media in advance of the Transmission List. The traffic department may create a push list log consisting of spots needed for air tomorrow. The log file may then be translated into a playlist file by the automation Traffic Translator and loaded into the Push List. A Simple GMT System The illustration below shows a simple fibrechannel GMT system. A Requester assigned to the Transmission List queries the destination device for availability of media. If an ID on the Transmission List cannot be registered by the destination device (because the ID does not exist in the destination device), the Requester passes a request to the Distributor. The Distributor is assigned to the GMT List and is in communication with a source device. If the Distributor, after querying its source device, finds that the media is available, it will create an event on the GMT List that will initiate a Fibrechannel transfer. The Distributor will run the event on the GMT List and the media will be copied from the source device to the destination device. Once the copy process has begun, the source device will inform the system that the media is now available for registration on the Transmission List and playout Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 172 of 288

173 FlexSync FlexSync About the Air Client ADC FlexSync TM Option ADC FlexSync is an enhancement to the ADC Air Client v3 that provides a powerful, yet operationally simple means of duplicating the events and actions of one Transmission List on another Transmission List. While not an automatic process, ADC FlexSync provides tremendous operational flexibility, allowing any combination of independent and duplicated operations. The user is provided with a dedicated duplication control panel with status for both lists, including the last time a duplication was performed, and if any edits have since been applied to either list. At any time, the user can duplicate a list s events (with an option to apply time synchronization) while allowing lists to operate independently and avoiding the inadvertent replication of operational errors that may occur on either of the lists. ADC FlexSync also provides action-by-action manual control of either or both of the lists. ADC FlexSync is not limited to any particular utilization, deployment, or workflow. Rather, it is general purpose functionality that can be used to support multiple operational requirements. Purchase Note: ADC FlexSync is a for-purchase option to Air Client. Contact your Automation Sales representative for more information. For details reference the ADC FlexSync Reference document. Implementation In an ADC system, Transmission Lists operate within a Device Server. These lists control devices and provide the actual execution of the playout. Once an Air Client is connected to the Device Server(s), the Transmission Lists are accessible via its user interface. When ADC FlexSync is installed on an Air Client, a relationship between any two lists can be defined in which one is designated as the Normal (source) list and the other as the Duplicate (destination) list. These List Duplication Pairs are defined in advance and have no effect on operation until utilized. Normal List List A List Duplicate List List B List Air Client Transmission List List Transmission List List Device Server A Device Server B 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 173 of 288

174 FlexSync Deployment and Workflows The ability to duplicate lists as needed provides a solution for numerous operational models and scenarios. The following are some of the many different operations the ADC FlexSync option can support. Duplication of Lists Between ADC Systems: ADC FlexSync can provide List Duplication between independent ADC systems. These systems may be located at the same or separate sites and the Air Client on which ADC Flex Sync is installed can be located at any location where it can maintain a network API connection to both systems. Maintaining a Backup Device Server: In a simple Main \ Backup Device Server pair scenario, ADC FlexSync can easily maintain a list on the backup. In this case, devices would not be available on the backup Device Server, so the lists would not execute on the backup system, unless the Missing Media Switch-Only were used. However, duplicating lists to reflect day of air changes, as well as the progress of the schedule, provides significant operational advantages if a switch to the backup is required- with no additional resource requirements. N to 1 Site or System Backup: In a single aggregated backup system scenario providing backup or disaster recovery for multiple Normal systems, ADC FlexSync can provide arbitrary mapping between any two lists. N + 1 Site or System Backup: With a single set of backup resources - both the Duplicate List and its device resources - ADC FlexSync can be used to provide backup for multiple Normal Lists on an as-needed basis. While this approach does not provide continuous redundancy, it can be used to provide a significant measure of protection without excessive resource requirements. Peer-to-Peer Site or System Backup: Where multiple ADC systems exist, instead of providing an additional ADC system and resources dedicated to backup, ADC FlexSync can be used to expand the existing on-air systems to provide mutual redundancy. N + 1 List Backup: In supporting List Duplication between multiple lists on the same Device Server, ADC FlexSync can be used to provide both redundancy and operational flexibility. Disaster Recovery: For disaster recovery site deployments ADC FlexSync allows simple and rapid transfer of operation to an alternate location should circumstances require Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 174 of 288

175 LinkList LinkList About LinkList Many broadcasters already are or soon will be faced with the need to originate multiple feeds from a single location. While some feeds might be similar, there may be a requirement to breakaway from the primary feed and insert region-specific spots or to provide dual feeds of standard and high definition material. Air Client s LinkList option is an automated solution to this challenge. It provides operators with an easy means of creating different playlists for a number of feeds --- each playlist slightly different from the other. LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. Once playlists are linked, changes made to the master playlist in content or event order are mirrored by linked lists, ensuring that all associated events are synchronized. Link List also supports multiple master lists within the Link List configuration. This allows Link List to have a wider operational scope and is beneficial for multi-station groups that want to utilize Link List to provide for targeted commercial insertion. Purchase Note: ADC LinkList is a for-purchase option to Air Client. Contact your Automation Sales representative for more information. Reference Note: For information on the operation and configuration of this feature see the ADC LinkList Reference document Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 175 of 288

176 Air Client Installation Air Client Installation To Install Air Client on a Workstation This section describes how to install the Air Client on a client workstation using the Installation Wizard. If installing a new version of Air Client over an existing version: Before installing, reboot the computer. Do not run Air Client on this station after rebooting and before installing the new version. If this is not done, the installation may not complete successfully, and may have to be restarted. 1. Contact Automation support for the Air Client installation package. 2. Run the Installation Wizard (Setup.exe). 3. Read the Welcome dialog. Press Next when you are ready to continue. 4. Press Yes after you ve read the license dialog. 5. If you would like to change the directory into which the Air Client program files will be installed, press Browse. Press Next when you are ready to continue. 6. Select the type of used ADC database from the list of available options. (currently, most customers use SQL Server). Btrieve support Metalink Automation Interface SQL Server support (Default) 7. Select the Start Menu folder for Air Client. Change the default if desired and press Next when you are ready to continue. 8. If installing the Air Client for the first time the next two dialogs allow you to enter the names of the client and the name of the primary server that you will connect to. 9. On the last dialog press Finish to complete the installation. Default.ini Settings The following Air Client options are assigned a Default value on initial startup. The following tables list these new startup settings.. LIST OPTIONS: Adjust Durations When SOM Changes SOMAdjustDur TRUE Update Events With Valid SOMs UpdateDurIfNoSOM TRUE 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 176 of 288

177 Air Client Installation Check IDs Against Valid ID List CheckIDs TRUE Clear Reconciliation Keys on Edit ClearKeys FALSE Clear Reconciliation Keys on Cut ClearKeysonCut FALSE Clear Fields When ID Not Found ClearField FALSE Notify When Database Fails DBErrorMessage TRUE Warn On Edit of Playing Event WarnOnPlayEdit TRUE Retain Segment Numbers Keep Segment# TRUE Verify Copy Against DB TRUE ASRUN: Enabled Asrun Enabled TRUE Text File UseText TRUE Use Asrun Date UseAsRunDate TRUE Include Reconciliation Key ReconcileKey TRUE Short Clip ShortClip 00:00:02 Days To Keep KeepDays 30 ERRORS: AUTO LIST SAVE -- Errors (Log to Disk=) -- Log Errors TRUE (Only the UI, this doesn't mean to actually ENABLE auto list save by default) Save Full Save Lookahead TRUE FALSE About XP settings and LANACFG settings For information on XP settings and LANACFG settings see Appendix D. Create a Desktop Shortcut for Air Client The Air Client shortcut icon is used to launch the Air Client application from an icon on the desktop. About Shortcut Parameters Before launching Air Client, create a shortcut and specify parameters in the shortcut target, such as the file path to the application, the client name and the Device Server name. Optionally, parameters can be specified that include the backup Device Server name, the 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 177 of 288

178 Air Client Installation maximum length of a material s name and title and the platform the Device Server is running on. Example: Limitations: Ensure the MAIN and BACKUP Device Servers are configured identically in terms of devices and assignments. It is expected a Main/Backup configuration is to be used with a serial transfer switch to move devices from the MAIN Device Server to the BACKUP Device Server. Do not configure both main/backup Device Servers in the shortcut and the multiserver login at the same time (on a per client basis) as it can cause issues with prep form displays during connection/reconnection. Configuring main/backup Device Servers in the client shortcut is not dependent on Multiserver login feature. Create an Air Client shortcut in the Start Menu To create a shortcut, perform these tasks: 1. Right-click the Windows task bar and then click Properties 2. Select Advanced tab Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 178 of 288

179 Air Client Installation 3. Click on Add. 4. Click on Browse to locate the Air Client application. 5. Select which program folder to place the shortcut, and then click Next. 6. Click on Finish to create shortcut in the Start Menu. Create a Shortcut on the Desktop for a Local Instance 1. Open My Computer on desktop. 2. Open Local Disk (C:). 3. Open Air Client folder Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 179 of 288

180 Air Client Installation 4. Right mouse click and hold on the Air Client.exe file and drag to the desktop. 5. Select Create Shortcut(s) here. 6. Define the shortcut properties by right clicking on the icon and selecting Properties. 7. Click the Shortcut tab. The Target: field should contain a path following this format: [file path] [client name] [server name] [backup name] {material ID length} {material title length} {platform} Modify the entries as required: Note: Remember to include a space between the entries. IMPORTANT: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility should be configured in the same mode (Non-extended: IDLEN=8 TITLELEN=16 or Extended: IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32). [file path]: The file path of the Air Client application is the path the shortcut follows to launch Air Client. This is defined for you when you create a shortcut. [client name]: Specify the name of the client, using no more than eight characters. Each client must have a unique name on the network. For example: ACLIENT1. The client name should be the same as the PC s name just without the hyphen. For example: PC windows login = ACLIENT-1, session login for Client Application = ACLIENT1 [server name]: Specify the name of the server to connect to when launching. For example: MAIN_DS. [backup name]: Specify a backup server to connect to in the event the main server fails. For example: BACKUP_DS IMPORTANT Multi-Server Logon Note: With multiple server login the backup server name is not needed to be on the shortcut command line. {material ID length}: If the material ID contains more than 8 characters, use the idlen parameter to specify the maximum number of characters (up to 32) the ID can contain. For example, Idlen=32. This is only available when using the extended database. {material title length}: If the title contains more than 16 characters, use the titlelen parameter to specify the maximum number of characters (up to 32) for the material title. For example: Titlelen=32. This is only available when using the extended database. {platform}: If the server you are connecting to runs Microsoft Windows NT, enter /nt or \nt. Enter /nt to enable long device and playlist names. Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in the command line parameters on the application s desktop shortcut Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 180 of 288

181 Air Client Installation Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client. With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server. 8. When finished click OK. Create a Shortcut on the Desktop for a Remote WAN or LAN Instance IMPORTANT: This setup is validated for Windows XP operations only. It has not been validated for Windows 7 operations. 1. Open My Computer on desktop. 2. Open Local Disk (C:). 3. Open Air Client folder. 4. Right mouse click and hold on the Air Client.exe file and drag to the desktop. 5. Select Create Shortcut(s) here. 6. Define the shortcut properties by right clicking on the icon and selecting Properties. 7. Click the Shortcut tab. The Target: field should contain a path following this format: [file path] [client name] [server IP Address] {material ID length} {material title length} {/REMOTE} {/Rate} {/KAT} {platform} Modify the entries as required: Note: Remember to include a space between the entries. IMPORTANT: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility should be configured in the same mode (Non-extended: IDLEN=8 TITLELEN=16 or Extended: IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32). Note: The /Rate parameter only applies if the /REMOTE parameter is also given on the command line. [file path]: The file path of the Air Client application is the path the shortcut follows to launch Air Client. This is defined for you when you create a shortcut. [client name]: Specify the name of the client, using no more than eight characters. Each client must have a unique name on the network. For example: ACLIENT1. The client name should be the same as the PC s name just without the hyphen. For example: PC windows login = ACLIENT-1, session login for Client Application = ACLIENT Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 181 of 288

182 Air Client Installation [Server IP Address]: Specify the Internet IP address of the Device Server on the command line instead of the name given on the Device Server command line for communications. Each IP service available on a particular PC must have a unique port number. By default the Device Server will use TCP port 10052, and UDP port The UDP port cannot be changed, but the TCP port number may be set to a different number. This number will probably never need to be changed. There are only two reasons why it would need to be changed, if the port is blocked by the firewall; or if another program is already using the port number on the Device Server computer. Both of these are unlikely to occur. If the port number is changed to a different number than 10052, the same port number must be used in the configuration of the Device Server and on the command line of the Remote Air Client. If the default port number is used, the port number isn t required on the command line, but if it is given it must immediately follow the Internet address and be separated from the address by a colon. E.g.: : {material ID length}: If the material ID contains more than 8 characters, use the idlen parameter to specify the maximum number of characters (up to 32) the ID can contain. For example, Idlen=32. This is only available when using the extended database. {material title length}: If the title contains more than 16 characters, use the titlelen parameter to specify the maximum number of characters (up to 32) for the material title. For example: Titlelen=32. This is only available when using the extended database. {/REMOTE}: This parameter tells the Air Client that it will connect to the Device Server over a WAN. In this mode the Remote Air Client periodically requests status updates from the Device Server. {/Rate=x}: This parameter determines the number of frames to count between status requests. The variable x can be any number greater than 30. If the /Rate parameter isn t specified on the command line, the rate defaults to 30. At 30, status requests are sent to the Device Server once per second under NTSC. This parameter should not be set to a value less than 30. Adjusting this parameter to a value greater than 30 may improve performance on congested networks, but it will decrease the interval between updates of the timecode and status displays. The timecode displays will continue to count locally between updates, but any changes in device status will not be shown until the next update. Note: The /Rate parameter only applies if the /REMOTE parameter is also given on the command line. {/KAT=x}: This parameter allows modification of the keep-alive timer interval. The keep-alive timer causes a message to be sent periodically from the Remote Air Client to the Device Server for the purpose of determining that the WAN connection is good and the Device Server is still responding. After sending the keep-alive message the Remote Air Client waits for a response. If a response is not received within the keepalive interval, the Remote Air Client displays a message indicating that the connection with the Device Server has been lost. The message box gives the user the option of either retrying the connection or aborting the RAC. The value x indicates the number of seconds for the keep-alive interval. If the /KAT parameter is not specified on the command line the keep-alive interval defaults to 35 seconds. It is recommended that this interval not be changed. If the interval is too short, the RAC may display retry/abort messages when the connection is still good. If the interval is too long it will delay detection of an actual problem with the Device Server or WAN connection Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 182 of 288

183 Air Client Installation {platform}: If the server you are connecting to runs Microsoft Windows NT, enter /nt or \nt. Enter /nt to enable long device and playlist names. Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in the command line parameters on the application s desktop shortcut. Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client. With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server. 8. When finished click OK. Example Command Lines: C:\RAC\ACLNT32.exe ACLIENT :10054 IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32 /REMOTE /RATE=60 /KAT=35 /NT C:\RAC\ACLNT32.exe ACLIENT :10054 IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32 /KAT=35 /NT 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 183 of 288

184 Configuring System Components Configuring System Components Configuring Multiple Device Server Connections Air Client can be configured to connect to up to eight device servers on the network. Note: Multiple server login (multiserver login) is only available to customers who have purchased it. Clients supporting this feature will have a Servers menu on the Air Client desktop. Limitations: Ensure the MAIN and BACKUP Device Servers are configured identically in terms of devices and assignments. It is expected a Main/Backup configuration is to be used with a serial transfer switch to move devices from the MAIN Device Server to the BACKUP Device Server. Do not configure both main/backup Device Servers in the shortcut and the multiserver login at the same time (on a per client basis) as it can cause issues with prep form displays during connection/reconnection. Configuring main/backup Device Servers in the client shortcut is not dependent on Multiserver login feature. To Add, Edit, or Remove a Server 1. From the Air Client main menu select Servers > Available Servers... The Edit Available Server dialog box is displayed listing the servers Air Client can connect to Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 184 of 288

185 Configuring System Components 2. To Add a Server and connect Air Client to a server not specified in the Target field of the shortcut properties: Click the Add... button. The Add Server dialog is displayed. In the Add Server dialog box, enter the name of the server in the Enter Server Name: field. The name of the server cannot exceed 15 characters. Click OK. The server is added to the Available Servers: field in the Edit Available Servers dialog box. 3. To Edit a Server and connect Air Client to a server not specified in the Target field of the shortcut properties: Click the Edit... button. The Edit Server dialog is displayed. In the Edit Server dialog box, enter the name of the server in the Enter Server Name: field. The name of the server cannot exceed 15 characters. Click OK. The server is added to the Available Servers: field in the Edit Available Servers dialog box. 4. To Remove a Server and make the device server unavailable to Air Client: From the Edit Available Server dialog, select the server in the Available Servers: Click the Remove button. 5. When finished click OK. Configuring Playlist Options 1. From the main toolbar select the VIEW LIST Icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 185 of 288

186 Configuring System Components 2. Choose the desired List, and then click OK. A playlist window is opened. Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here. 3. Right click on the playlist window and from the pop-up menu select Options. The Play List Options dialog is displayed. 4. Select the Counts tab. Use this tab to specify the lookahead value for a transmission list and the display of done events in a playlist. Configure the following parameters as required: About Minimum Difference between Values: The minimum Look Ahead value is 11 and the minimum difference between the Look Ahead and Done Count values must be more than 1. Look Ahead: Enter the number of events in the lookahead field to define a playlist s lookahead range. The lookahead is the number of events whose media Air Client will verify the availability of in a playlist. Events within the lookahead range will display in blue if they are primary events and are located on the specified device. Events out of range display in black. If an event is within the lookahead range, but is missing media, it will display in red. Setting the lookahead for the entire list uses more system resources. This value is configured as per the customer s request. If a duration based look ahead is configured (Done in NTConfig only) than this field is not used. *Typically between events. If GMT is used this value may be lower. Done Count: Determine the number of done events that display in a playlist. The Done count should not exceed the Lookahead value. This value is configured as per the customer s request. Default should be Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 186 of 288

187 Configuring System Components Note on List Lock: If a list in experiencing a List Lock, the List Lock is not cleared, and it has been ensured that no other client or process is modifying the list, then the Done Count can be set to a value of 2 or greater in this list's Options > Counts configuration tab. 5. Select the Times tab. Use this tab to specify parameters for start times for certain kinds of events. Configure the following parameters as required: Timed List: Check to enable. When enabled, this parameter allows Hard Start events to run at predetermined time in the Time field. This must be enabled when using Hard Timed events. Update On-Air Time: Check to enable. When Auto Ripple is turned on the actual start time of an event will update the Time field so the AsRun log reflects the accurate time. Auto Ripple allows this feature to work correctly. Auto Ripple Times: Check to enable. When you change the duration of an event, the projected start time for the events that follow are automatically changed based on the durations for each event. Auto Ripple will ripple the times down from the On-Air event down to the next Hard Start or to the end of the list. Deleting or adding events to a playlist will cause the playlist start times to be recalculated. Auto rippling will stop at a hard start event. Hard start events will interrupt any preceding events whose times overlap its time. 6. Select the Threading tab. Use this tab to control threading behavior Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 187 of 288

188 Configuring System Components Configure the following parameters as required: Thread After Break: Check to enable threading events immediately following a secondary Break line. You will not have to manually thread events after the Break line if this is selected. Breaks are only used when the automation is playing spots and not program material. Keep List Threaded: Check to enable keeping as many devices as possible threaded in the lookahead. If an event is inserted into a playlist, the event is cued and subsequent events are unthreaded, as necessary. Note: When unchecked, events in the range specified in the Thread Time: field are cued Thread Time: (Default: 00:02:00:00) Keep List Thread time determines which events within the specified time get threaded and cued. * This applies when Keep List Threaded option is not selected. Entering a value of two minutes in the Thread Time: field, for example, will cue events that will play within two minutes of the current time. 7. Select the Tensioning tab. Use this tab to control tensioning. Configure the following parameters as required: Release Tension When Cued: Check to enable. After a VTR event is cued, the tape is tension released. The tape is tensioned when the event reaches the Standby On Time Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 188 of 288

189 Configuring System Components Tension After Up Counter: Check to enable keeping the following VTR event ready to play when playing out of the Live event. About Tension Events: Tension events following an upcount event assume a fixed duration for the upcount event, instead of an indefinite duration. All events within the Standby On time that follow the upcount event are tensioned on. This is used for live broadcasts when the duration is known. Otherwise, the events are tension released and the next event must be tensioned on manually by clicking the Ready button on the control panel. 8. Select the Skip Control tab. Use this tab to determine how certain events are skipped. Configure the following parameters as required: Skip Bad Events: Check to enable to skip missing events. The list will skip missing (red) events in the list and, no matter what setting is specified for Switch to Black or Station ID on Skip, it will NOT switch to another source during the transition. If one primary event or two consecutive primary events are missing in the list, the list skips them and continues running. If there are 3 consecutive primary events missing in the list, the list will stop. Station ID On Skip: When enabled, the pre-defined input (switcher configuration) is shown ONLY when a GOOD event that is running is skipped using the hardware control panel or the software control panel and that input will be switched only during the preroll of the next event. This setting will override the Switch to Black option. 9. Select the Misc. tab. Use this tab to configure miscellaneous options which apply to playlist behavior in a transmission list window Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 189 of 288

190 Configuring System Components Configure the following parameters as required: Switch To Black: Check to enable. Allows automation to automatically switch to the pre-defined input (switcher configuration) ONLY when the list stops. If the customer is to use Station ID on Skip, do not select this option. Play Hard Hits: Check to enable. This allows the operator to manually play a Hard Start event at a time other than its pre-designated time. If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist has stopped running. Contact Start: Check to enable. To trigger an event on the Playlist with a General Purpose Interface (GPI) contact, click the Contact Start button. Pressing a contact is equivalent to clicking the Play button on the control panel. Note: This parameter is usually not turned on unless customer is using GPI s to trigger events on the Playlist. Auto A-B Routing: Check to enable alternate primary event s switcher routing between the A and B input channels. When enabled, you can use the wipe, mix and mixed transition effects on two consecutive primary events. Otherwise attempting to do so would cause the transmission of black when the switch occurs. Note: This parameter is typically disabled (unchecked). Play ID Time Mismatches: Check to enable. When enabled and a Playlist is appended, any events that mismatch the record in an LMS database environment will play as per what the original traffic log dictated. ID Title mismatch checks ID title pairs from the transmission list against the database and cassette in a cart machine. Normally, the ID and titles on the transmission list match the database and cassette and no errors are generated by the system when a list is loaded. Note: This feature is only supported for customers using the Sony LMS database environment and requires the use of a tape preparation database product, such as Media Client. 10. Select the Security tab. Use this tab to configure security and list confirmations for any modification of a Play List. Without Albrecht VPS: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 190 of 288

191 Configuring System Components With Albrecht VPS enabled: Configure the following parameters as required: Link to Recycle Bin: Check to enable. When the Air Client software user deletes one or several events from the Transmission list, if the Link to Recycle Bin option of the Transmission list is checked, those events are written into the RECYCLE.lst file. Confirm event edition (Revise): Enable the Confirmations for the edition done with Revise (Revise, Insert Primary / Secondary in the corresponding List. Disables the possibility to insert while in Revise mode. When this option is enabled (checked), each time and operator toggles Revise-off for any event (i.e. leaves edit mode), a confirmation message is displayed. As shown in the following example, the operator can choose to: Click Apply to apply the event modifications. Click Find Next to locate the next event. Click Cancel to abort the operation Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 191 of 288

192 Configuring System Components Confirm list modification (del/cut. Insert, update, move): Enable the Confirmations for the edition done without Revise in the corresponding List. When this option is enabled (checked), each time and operator modifies a list (i.e. inserts / cuts / deletes / modifies / moves an event), a message similar to the following is displayed. As shown in the following example, the operator can choose to: Click Apply to apply the event modifications. Click Find Next to locate the next event. Click Cancel to abort the operation. Fast Find and Apply function: When enabled (checked), this option allows the operator to find the occurrences of the concerned Primary event, and easily apply the modification to them (2 key presses), and allows a very fast check of the modification for each occurrence of the corresponding Primary event. If not enabled (unchecked), the Cancel/Close button is always pre-selected after the use of Find Next Prim or Apply buttons. As shown in the following example, the operator can choose to: Click Apply (or press the Return or Space key on the keyboard) to apply the event modifications. (Find Next Primary button is pre-selected for next action.) Click Find Next Prim to locate the next primary event. (Apply button is preselected for next action.) Click Cancel/Close to abort the operation. Fast Find Active / Inactive Windows: The Fast Find mechanism applies for the confirmation windows: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 192 of 288

193 Configuring System Components Modify Primary Del/Cut Primary Insert before Primary Del/Cut Secondary of Primary Insert Secondary under Primary The Fast Find mechanism does not apply for the following confirmation windows. For these windows the Cancel/Close button is pre-selected and the Find Next button is grayed out. Modify Secondary of Primary Del/Cut events (bloc) to Move events (bloc) to before Primary Update Event against Database, Update List against Database, Ripple Time from event, Clear Done Events n to n, Replace event with. Delay from Air warning: Check to enable a delay from air warning of an event or list modification. Once enabled, specify Delay Value and Polling Value. If the event or list modification focused in the confirmation window is at less than a configurable delay from Air (list in Play), a red warning mentions: In Forbidden Area!. This warning is dynamic: If the confirmation window is opened out of the Forbidden Area, and still opened when entering in it, then the Warning appears. This notification does not have to be frame accurate. The verification of the delay from Air can be done each 5 seconds (to be sure to be warned at 30 seconds from air the delay value must be configured to 35 seconds). Delay Value: Active when Delay from Air warning is selected. Specify the delay period in hh:mm:ss from Air to trigger the Warning. (Minimum: 1 second, Default: 00:05:00) Polling Value: Active when Delay from Air warning is selected. Specify the polling period in seconds of the frequency checking if in Forbidden Area when a Confirmation window is opened. (Minimum: 1 second, Default: 5) Log List Edition: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) logging of any edition in the List. This option works in conjunction with Operation Log functionality. To make this parameter active on the corresponding List, enable Edition on the Properties > Operation Log configuration window. Log List Control: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) logging of any Control action in the List. This option works in conjunction with Operation Log functionality. To make this parameter active on the corresponding List, enable List Control on the Properties > Operation Log configuration window. Albrecht VPS Options: The following options are only displayed when the VPS.bin file is present in the Air Client installation directory Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 193 of 288

194 Configuring System Components Use Albrecht VPS Title Editor: Check to use a customized editor for the title of events for the Albrecht VPS device. This editor provides selection of values, validates inputs, and formats the title in the required fashion for this driver. Allow non-title field edits: Check to allow non-title fields of events to be edited. Leave unchecked to prevent changes being made to these fields. Allow non-vps field edits: Check to allow the user to edit fields of events other than those for the Albrecht VPS device. Leave unchecked to prevent changes being made to events for devices other than the Albrecht VPS. VPS Note: A VPS.BIN file is required to enable this functionality. Those customers who have purchased the Albrecht functionality, please contact Automation Customer Support for the VPN.BIN file. Ensure the VPS.BIN file is placed in the Air Client installation directory (i.e. the same directory as the aclnt32.exe file). 11. When finished click OK. Configuring Window Column Settings 1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.), or a Database window. 2. Right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Columns. The Column setting dialog is displayed. 3. Assign columns: Use arrow keys to move options from Available pane to Displayed pane. Use the move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries. >: Move a single entry from Available pane to Displayed pane >>: Move all entries from Available pane to Displayed pane <: Move a single entry from Displayed pane back to Available pane 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 194 of 288

195 Configuring System Components <<: Move all entries from Displayed pane back to Available pane 4. To set or reset a column width: Ensure the column is listed in the Displayed columns pane. Column width can only be edited when a column is in this pane. Select the entry in the Displayed columns pane, and then enter a new value in the Width field. You can also use the spin arrows to increment or decrement the entry. (Recommended: Accept the default settings.) 5. To order columns, select an entry in the Displayed columns pane, and then Click the Up button to move the entry up in the list Click the Down button to move the entry down in the list 6. (Option) To Edit Column Settings Ensure the column is listed in the Available columns pane. Column settings can only be edited when a column is in this pane. Click Edit. The Column setting dialog for that column is displayed. Use the down arrow to select from a list of alternate parameter settings, and the click OK. (The list of available parameters settings is different for each column.) 7. (Option) To Add a Column: Click Add Enter a name in the Column Name dialog and then press OK. The new column name appears in the Available columns pane. You can now: Set column width. See step Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 195 of 288

196 Configuring System Components Specify column settings for the new column. See Step 7. Rename the column. Click Rename and in the name dialog specify a different name. This action is only available for a newly added column. 8. (Option) To Remove a Column Ensure the column is listed in the Available columns pane. Column entries can only be removed when the column is in this pane. Click Remove. The system prompts for confirmation of the action. Click OK. The Column is removed. 9. (Option) To save the new column organization/entries as a template: Click Save as Template. The system warns the action will overwrite the existing template. Click OK to accept. 10. (Option) To use / revert to the default column template click Use Template. 11. When finished click OK. Configuring Window Font Settings 1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.), or a Database window. 2. Right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Fonts. The Font setting dialog is displayed. 3. Configure the following parameters as required: Font, Font style, Size, and Script. 4. When finished click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 196 of 288

197 Configuring System Components Configuring Window Parameter Colors 1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.). 2. Right click on the playlist window and from the pop-up menu select Colors. The Select Colors setting dialog is displayed. 3. Select the Event Colors tab to change the event s colors. Configure the following parameters as required: From the Event Type list pane choose an event type Change the following colors for the selected event type as required: Foreground: Set foreground color Background: Set background color Set Default: Set colors to default When specifying a foreground or background color, select a new color from the color palette. 4. Select the Select Colors tab to change the default selection colors Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 197 of 288

198 Configuring System Components Configure the following parameters as required: From the Selection Type list pane choose a selection type. As required, click the Background... button and select a color from the palette. 5. When finished click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 198 of 288

199 Configuring System Properties Configuring System Properties Environment Properties Use this procedure to configure the following environment properties: List Options, System Directory Paths, List Directory Paths, Device Status Colors, Device Storage Colors, and Cell Colors. 1. From the main menu select Properties> Environment. This opens the Environment Options dialog. 2. Select the List Directories tab. Use this tab to specify directory paths for: Playlist, Compile List, and Sectional List. Click the down arrows to select an entry from dropdown lists, OR Click the browse button ( ) to search for available paths. On a typical installation, the file paths are set as follows: Play List: E:\PLAYLIST Compile List: E:\COMPLIST Sectional List: E:\SECLIST 3. Select the System Directories tab. Use this tab to specify system directory paths for: Database, Text Files, Traffic Log, and Mismatched Files. Click the down arrows to select an entry from dropdown lists, OR Click the browse button ( ) to search for appropriate file paths. On a typical installation, the file paths are set as follows: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 199 of 288

200 Configuring System Properties Database: D:\ Text Files: E:\ASRUN\ Traffic Log: E:\TRAFFIC\ Mismatched Files: E:\MISMATCH\ File Server Path: E:\SERVER\ 4. Select the List Options tab. Use this tab to configure how a playlist processes field information when an ID is entered or a list is loaded or validated. This is where Automatic Event Validation can be set up. Configure / select the following options as required: Adjust Durations When SOM Changes. This option adjusts the duration of an event according to changes made to an event s SOM. If the SOM is increased, the duration is decreased by an equal amount, for example. Or, if the SOM is decreased, the duration is increased by an equal amount. This ensures that the event will not play beyond its EOM time Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 200 of 288

201 Configuring System Properties IMPORTANT: For this parameter to work correctly, ensure Device Server Clocking parameter: Round DF is set to off: (Configuration Tool-> Configured Devices-> File menu in Configured Devices-> Clock-> Set Source-PC: PC Clock; Round DF: OFF.) Update Events with Valid SOMs. This option changes all events SOMs according to their records in the database when they are entered into a playlist. It will overwrite any events specified SOMs that differ from their database records. Optionally, events without specified SOMs can be assigned SOMs according to their records in the database by clicking Verify List Against DB on the Events menu. To verify one event, or a range of events, select the event and click Verify Event Against DB on the Events menu. Check IDs Against Valid ID List. When checked, an ID entered into a playlist not located in the database will be checked against the Valid IDs list. Otherwise, an error dialog box opens when an ID is entered but not found in the Valid ID list if the Notify When ID Not Found option is enabled. Use List Durations. When this option is enabled (checked), Air Client uses the durations of events in the playlist, not the database. When this option is disabled (unchecked), durations specified in the database are used. Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, each event s ID is checked against the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. However, with Use List Durations enabled, any non-null durations present in the playlist are retained; they are not updated from the database as some of these events could intentionally have durations that (may) differ from the database duration of their ID. Note: The Verify copy against DB option and the Use List Durations options are mutually exclusive. (i.e. They cannot both be enabled; it s either on or the other.) Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, if Use List Durations is enabled, each event s ID is checked against the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. In this case Verify Copy Against Database will be disabled so any copied/pasted event will keep the List Duration. Title Mismatch. A title mismatch occurs when the value of an event s title field does not match the event s record in the database. To create a title mismatch file, click the Title Mismatch button. A title mismatch file is a list of IDs whose titles in the playlist differ from those in the database. Duration Mismatch. When checked, the system will create a Duration Mismatch file listing events that have a duration that does not match the ID s duration in the database within the specified number of frames in the Max. Frame Difference field. Maximum Frame Difference. (This option is displayed when Duration Mismatch is checked.) If the difference between an event s Dur time and its record s Dur time exceeds the frame value specified in the Max. frame difference: field, the event will be logged in the mismatch file. Allow Secondary Event Hiding. This allows the user to use the option of Secondary Event Hiding in the Playlist Options menu. Use GMT Pull List. The GMT Pull List option allows to list in the Pull List only the clips missing in the devices assigned to the List and not in a GMT source device usable for this List. Clear Reconciliation Keys on Edit. When this option is checked, editing events will remove the reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been edited to change the ID. Clear Reconciliation Keys on Copy. When this option is checked, copying events will remove the reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been copied Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 201 of 288

202 Configuring System Properties Clear Fields When ID Not Found. Click this button to clear the title and SOM fields when an ID is entered but not found in either the database. The duration will default to 30 seconds. This prevents events from containing the wrong SOMs and DURs when an event s ID is edited and is not found in the database. Otherwise, when an ID is changed and does not match an ID in the database, the fields do not clear. Notify When Database Fails. When an ID cannot be verified in the database because of a database failure, use this option so Air Client will notify you. Notify When ID Not Found. When checked, a dialog box will alert you when an event ID entered into a playlist is not found in the database or the Valid IDs list. Use List Titles. This option uses the titles of events from a traffic list instead of the database when loaded into a playlist. If this option is not checked, titles listed in the database are used. Warn On Edit of Playing Event. If this option is checked, editing an event that is playing results in a dialog box notifying you that the event is playing. Retain Segment Numbers. When a single spot event is inserted in a playlist with a specified segment number, the segment number is removed. To disable this, select this option to retain the segment number. Auto Focus Event Centered. During on air play back the user can jump back to the on air event if the list is scrolled down further on the playlist. It will also allow the on air event to be centered in the list with the done events above in the window. Verify copy against DB. When this option is enabled (checked), an event that is copied and pasted to another location in the playlist or into another playlist will be verified for accuracy against the database. If they differ, the event metadata is updated to match the database. Note: The Verify copy against DB option and the Use List Durations options are mutually exclusive. (i.e. They cannot both be enabled; it s either on or the other.) Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, if Verify Copy Against Database is enabled, each event s ID is checked against the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. In this case Use List Durations will be disabled so any copied/pasted event will automatically validate its metadata against the Database. Clear Reconciliation Keys on Cut. When this option is checked, cutting events will remove the reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been cut. Verify Single Event against DB. When a single event is added to a playlist, it will be verified for accuracy against the database. When Verify Single Event Against DB is enabled and a Verify Event Against DB is performed, only the highlighted Event is verified against the Database, and nothing is done to any other instances of that Event on the List. When Verify Single Event Against DB is not enabled and a Verify Event Against DB is performed, the Air Client verifies all instances of that Event on the List against the Database. 5. Select the Status Colors tab Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 202 of 288

203 Configuring System Properties Select a device status (e.g. Normal, OnAir), and then select Edit to define the display colors for that status selection. When finished click OK. 6. Select the Storage Options tab. Configure the following parameters as required: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 203 of 288

204 Configuring System Properties Display Free Disk Space: Check to enable the display of available free space. Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window: Check to enable delete of IDs. Enhanced title search: Enable (check) /Disable (uncheck) the enhanced title search option. When Disabled (unchecked) the title is verified in the database using the original search process. (Default) When Enabled (checked) searching by title uses the enhanced process to improve search speed. CAUTION: In certain cases depending on the state of the database, there may be issues in locating multi-file multi-segment titles. IMPORTANT: The Enhanced Title Search is designed specifically for systems where video servers assigned to transmission lists contain many IDs that are not in the Automation Database. (An example of this is where the Production Server shares the same storage SAN as the Transmission server. The Production server may have 80% of the IDs in the SAN, but these IDs are not in the ADC Database. In this case, checking the Enhanced Title Search will improve search speeds significantly.) To modify Storage Colors: Select a Storage status (e.g. Normal, InUse). Select Edit to define the display colors for that selection. When finished click OK. 7. Select the Cell Colors tab Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 204 of 288

205 Configuring System Properties To modify Cell Colors: Select a Cell status (e.g. Current Column, Selected Row, Default Background) Select Edit to define the display colors for that selection. When finished click OK. 8. Select the Mix/Wipe tab. This tab contains configuration options for mix and wipe support for master control switchers. Events that include a mix or wipe transition are required to roll several frames early to allow the events to overlap. Note: A Wipe effect requires a Wipe number. Each brand of Master Control Switcher may have it own set of Wipes. Each event can have its own wipe number. These are displayed and edited in Effect Number # field in the playlist editors of the windows client. When the event is played the Wipe number in the event is passed to the switcher when the Wipe transition is started. The Wipe number is solely dependent on the Master Control Switcher being used and is not interpreted by the automation as anything but a number Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 205 of 288

206 Configuring System Properties Configure the following options as required: Enable Mix/Wipe Support. Play Mixes/Wipes Early: (Default: disabled) Check to enable the system to roll overlapping events early. It causes the list to pull back any events with the effect type of Mix, Wipe, or Mixed Transition. Note: Using this option will cause a playlist to end earlier than previously defined because events will overlap. It is the client operator s responsibility to reconcile this issue. Effect durations in frames: Set the frame values for slow, medium, and fast effect durations. Effect durations are the amount of overlap time between the end of one spot and the beginning of the next spot. Slow: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 60 frames. Medium: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 30 frames. Fast: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 15 frames. IMPORTANT: These parameters must match the effects durations configured in your master control switcher. Failure to do so will result in mistimed effects. 9. Select the Secondary Events tab. This tab provides the ability to delete secondary events together with their associated primary event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 206 of 288

207 Configuring System Properties Configure the following options as required: Enable (check)/ Disable (uncheck) the secondary events to delete when a primary event is deleted. When all check-boxes are selected (checked), all secondary events associated with a primary are deleted together with the associated primary. For Example: BREAK is disabled and others are enabled all secondary events except BREAK secondary event will be deleted when associated primary is deleted from list. For descriptions of all listed Secondary Events see, Appendix B: Secondary Events 10. When finished click OK. As-Run Log Properties An as run log file stores event and status information, such as errors and reconciliation keys as a transmission list window runs a playlist. Use this procedure to configure the As Run Log. 1. From the main menu select Properties > As-Run...The Asruns dialog is displayed. 2. Click a transmission list for which you want to create and configure as run log reporting. If there are no transmission lists available, click Add to add a Playlist file. The Choose list dialog is displayed listing all available lists Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 207 of 288

208 Configuring System Properties Note: The Choose Server dialog box appears if your Air Client workstation supports multiple server login. 3. On the Choose List dialog select a list and then click OK. The Asrun setup dialog is displayed. 4. Configure Logging Options: Check to enable each required configure as run logging, file types and functions from the list of available options Logging options include: Enable Asrun. To enable as run logging for a transmission list, click the Enable Asrun checkbox. Text File. Use this option to save an as run log as ASCII text file format. Binary File. Use this option to generate an external reconciliation file. The format of this binary file is determined by a.dll file. The two types of.dll files are the Sony and the Enterprise, both named asrun.dll or asrun32.dll. Log Tally. If this option is activated on the Air Client, and for the as run log configuration of a given transmission list, the as run log text file indicates on a specific line each change in the OnAir/OnLine status (Tally information associated with a specific transmission list). If the Log Tally parameter is enabled, the Tally status at the creation of the daily log file, and its later changes, are logged in the As Run log file Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 208 of 288

209 Configuring System Properties If the Log Tally parameter is disabled, the Tally status at the creation of the daily log file, and its later changes, are not logged. If there no Tally is configured for a given List, the Log Tally parameter in the corresponding As Run log is not active. If a Tally is configured for a given List, the Log Tally parameter in the corresponding As Run log configuration window is active. Enable Printing. Check to enable. Allows you to print event and status information for each event as it finishes play. Use Asrun Date. An event s scheduled start time is logged in an as run log file saved in binary file format instead of the system time. No Header. No header information is displayed in an as run log file saved in text file format Include Secondary Events. This option allows the inclusion of secondary events in the SONY Binary Asrun file. If this option is enabled, make sure your traffic system is prepared to read secondary events. This might require contacting your traffic system vendor. Unique List Number. This option allows the list number at the start of the AsRun log file name to be configured. This field allows entry of up to a 3 digit list number. The current 2 digit list number ("01" to "99") suffice for systems with up to 6 x Device Servers. For larger installation of over 6 x Device Severs, a 3 digit list number ("100 to 999") can be entered. To ensure reverse system compatibility, the list number that appears in the dialog box defaults to the list number for that AsRun log. This number is saved in the INI-file. Include Reconcile Key. This option includes all event s reconciliation keys in an as run log created in text file format only. Reconciliation keys are added to an event generated by the traffic department and identify a specific ID run at a specific time. This option controls the presence or not of reconcile key for the text Asrun file. Note: For binary file the recon key is always included. Update Database. Select to allow secondary recorded Id s to be saved to the database with the timecode and segment information. For Air Client AutoRecord When a SECONDARY RECORD event is finished recording, all subsequent replay events on the list are automatically filled in with the recorded duration and SOM. If any other lists on the same Automation Server contain the same replay events, they will be filled in also. Enable As Run/Update Database must be set up for your Secondary Record files to be stored permanently in the Media Client Database. This is only necessary if you need to permanently store your Secondary Record files for future replay beyond the current log. You should only use this option if the previous scenarios apply to your station. This must only be configured on one Air Client. Database Update Redirector: From the Database Update Redirector dropdown, select the DBUPD option to use a Database Update Redirector Device to notify other Device Servers of the database update. After a record is written to the Database, a message is sent to the Device Server for updating Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 209 of 288

210 Configuring System Properties The play-list As Run Log has an Update Database option. When Update Database is enabled (checked), a secondary record event is written to the database as a multi-segment after a secondary record event is run. However, in a multiple Device Server scenario the record doesn t notify the other Device Server. To address this a configurable Database Update Redirector option was added for the As-Run Log configuration of a playlist. An Database Update Redirector Device can be used to update events in other play-lists on a different Device Server. 5. Configure the following Other parameters: Start of Day. Enter a time value in the Start of Day: field to specify when the as run log feature should start a new log. This is used when a playlist is ran continuously. Short Clip. Enter a time value to specify how much time a spot may be played short without generating an error in the as run log. This is used primarily with Enterprise As Run log reconciliation. Printer Port. Specify a printer port on the Printer Port: button in the Other Options area. Need page Feed. Check to enable advance to a new sheet of paper after printing a full page of as run events. Only enable this if the printer does not support automatic page feeds, such as when sending the as run logs to a laser printer. Asrun Directory. Click the Browse button (...) to specify which directory to store as run logs. The default is the root directory of the Air Client application. As run logs are named the same, no matter which server they are written by. Use this feature to specify separate directories for each server so as run log files are not overwritten when using multiple servers. Use the Browse button ( ) to locate a directory. Custom Header File. Manually enter a file path name, or use list arrow to select from a list of available files. To browse for a file click.. An Open dialog is displayed allowing the operator to browse for and select the desired file. Days To Keep. Specify the number of days to keep as run logs before they are deleted. 6. To Change As Run Format(v), click Change As Run Format(v). The Asrun Log Format Configuration dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 210 of 288

211 Configuring System Properties Use > and < buttons to move column entries. Select an entry in the Available column and then click > to move the entry to the As Run Column. The column will be displayed in the As-Run file. Select an entry in the As Run column and then click > to move the entry to the Available Column. The column is removed and will not be displayed in the As- Run file. Use up and Down buttons to arrange the sequence of columns Specify a column and then specify its length, width and gutter size. Click Preview to preview the log format as it is being specified. (Option) Click Default to specify default settings. When finished click OK 7. (Option) To Edit an existing As-run list: Select a list from the Asruns dialog s Configured Lists pane, and then click Edit. The Asrun setup dialog is displayed populated with the selected list s settings. Make any required changes, and then click OK. Returns to the Asrun s dialog. 8. (Option) To Remove a existing As-run list, select a list from the Asrun s dialog s Configured Lists pane, and then click Remove. 9. When finished click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 211 of 288

212 Configuring System Properties Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties Use this procedure to configure parameters for Control Panel used with Air Client. Once these parameters have been set, they should not need to be changed. Control Panels used with the ADC Air Client v3 are: LCP 20 Operator Control Panel (OCP) Please contact your Tech Support Representative for assistance before changing any of the settings in this menu. IMPORTANT: Mixing OCP and LCP-20 panels on one Air Client is not supported. Attempting to do so will impact the Air Client s ability to launch. To Configure the LCP-20 panel The LCP 20 control panel is configured through the ADC Air Client v3 software. 1. From the Air Client main menu select Properties > Hardware Control Panel. The Control Panel selection dialog is displayed. 2. From the Control Panel selection dialog select the desired Control Panel from those listed in the left pane, and then click Edit. The Control Panel configuration dialog is displayed. 3. Select the LCP-20 tab Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 212 of 288

213 Configuring System Properties 4. From the Panel Type dropdown select LCP From the I/O Port dropdown select the desired Port. 6. (Optional) To set defaults for the panel click Set Defaults button. (An I/O port must be set before Default settings can be applied.) 7. To set a List Group Button Action, left click on a blank button (blank buttons are shown in two rows across the top of the LCP 20 tab pane). The List Group dialog appears Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 213 of 288

214 Configuring System Properties 8. Assign actions: Use arrow keys to move options from Available pane to Assigned pane. Use the move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries. >: Move a single entry from Available pane to Assigned pane >>: Move all entries from Available pane to Assigned pane <: Move a single entry from Assigned pane back to Available pane <<: Move all entries from Assigned pane back to Available pane 9. To set a Button Action, double left click on a button listed with No Action text. The Action dialog appears. 10. From the Actions dropdown select an action from the list, and then press OK. Assignable actions: The following is a description of each action you can assign to the action buttons on the hardware control panel: -1: Subtracts one second to the duration of the playing event. +1: Adds one second to the duration of the playing event. Cut Next: Deletes the event following the playing event. Note: Events deleted with this action are not recoverable from the clipboard. Freeze: Freezes the current frame of the video of a playing event. Hold: Holds the current event s duration, allowing the event to continue to play beyond its specified duration. Let Roll: Rolls an event without switching. Play: Plays the playlist. PrgRun: Prepares a playlist for play by threading the devices in a playlist Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 214 of 288

215 Configuring System Properties Protect: Switches between air and protect devices. Ready: Ready the media for the Play command. Recue: Recues the playing event. RollNow: Identical to the Roll button on the software control panel. Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button plays the event. Second: The Second action allows you to roll a secondary audio/video event without specifying a starting offset for the event. This allows you to start a primary event and roll the secondary event at any time by pressing the Second button. To identify which secondary audio/video event is affected by this action, you must remove any data in the TOD field of the event. When the Second button is pressed, the next secondary audio/video event with a blank TOD is rolled. If the Second button is pressed again, the next such event, if available, rolls. The Second button will not roll any other type of secondary event and will not roll to any secondary audio/video event if its TOD field is not blank. Also, a secondary audio/video event rolls the next secondary audio/video event with TOD field information if the secondary audio/video event does not have a Rejoin qualifier. This allows you to run a list of secondary audio/video events attached to the current primary event. If the Rejoin qualifier is attached to an event, then it will not roll any other secondary audio/video events. Note: You cannot roll consecutive secondary audio/video events with the same ID for devices that play program material. Some devices, such as still stores and audio carts, use the event ID to match to the event ID name of the device. If this is the case, the ID can be the same for consecutive secondaries. Skip: Skips the playing event and proceeds to the next event. Ten Rel: Tension releases the VTR for the next VTR event. Unthread: Unthreads lists assigned to a list button and stops on-air playout. 11. When all buttons are properly configured click on OK the Hardware Control Panel configuration dialog. The dialog closes. 12. Click on OK in the Control Panel selection dialog Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 215 of 288

216 Configuring System Properties Cabling The supplied interconnect cable runs from the Air Client s control panel (LCP-20) to Com Port 1. This is a 9-pin male to female cable, approximately 6 feet (2 meters) long and is wired pinto-pin. To Configure the Operator Control Panel (OCP) The Operator Control Panel (OCP) is configured through the ADC Air Client v3 software. Air Client supports up to two Operator Control panels and allows you to configure the functionality of control and list buttons. Up to 10 banks of 6 list buttons can be configured. The Bank selection buttons allows an operator to select each bank of list buttons. List buttons are used to open a transmission list quickly during Air Client operation. List buttons are arranged in banks of 6 button assignments each (Bank 1, Bank 2, Bank 3, Bank 10). Pressing a different Bank button on the panel switches the top row of 6 LED buttons on the panel to that bank of 6 assigned List buttons. A button from the bank can be assigned to a single list or to several lists. Once assigned, when button is pressed for that bank, control is shifted to that list. When ADC shifts control to that list, the panel will stay in sync and also shift control to the same list. Control buttons allow the operator to perform control actions on the currently active List or Lists. The labels are editable in the User Interface. If a button's label is blank (no spaces or other characters) the button's backlight is extinguished. 1. From the Air Client main menu select Properties > Hardware Control Panel. The Hardware Control Panel selection dialog is displayed. 2. Select which COM port the control panel is connect to, and then click on Edit. The Hardware Control Panel configuration dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 216 of 288

217 Configuring System Properties 3. Select the OCP tab. 4. From the Panel Type dropdown select OCP. 5. From the I/O Port dropdown select the desired Port. 6. (Optional) To set default settings for the panels click Set Defaults button. (An I/O Port must be selected before the Defaults can be set.) 7. To Configure the List group. List groups are used to open a transmission list quickly during Air Client operation. In the Lists pane, double click on a specific numbered button (left panel) which corresponds to a physical button on the OCP top row of 6 buttons. (Notice the buttons are already in groups of six.). The List Assignment dialog appears. The Device Server(s) provides information of the Lists that are available Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 217 of 288

218 Configuring System Properties Select which Transmission List will open when the button is pressed on the OCP. Use the move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries. >: Move a single entry from Available pane to Assigned pane >>: Move all entries from Available pane to Assigned pane <: Move a single entry from Assigned pane back to Available pane <<: Move all entries from Assigned pane back to Available pane Note: Gang play can be implemented by selecting multiple lists on a single list button. When finished, click OK. 8. (Option) To Rename a List group: Right click on a List entry in the left pane, and then from the popup menu select Rename. The List group rename dialog appears. Rename the entry and then click OK. 9. To Set a Button Action for OCP Buttons Action buttons are used to carry out numerous On Air actions during Air Client operation. In the Buttons Action pane, click on a specific button which corresponds to a physical button on the OCP (buttons 7 24) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 218 of 288

219 Configuring System Properties From the Actions dropdown select an action from the list, and then click OK. Assignable actions: The following is a description of each action you can assign to the action buttons on the hardware control panel: -1: Subtracts one second to the duration of the playing event. +1: Adds one second to the duration of the playing event. Cut Next: Deletes the event following the playing event. Note: Events deleted with this action are not recoverable from the clipboard. Freeze: Freezes the current frame of the video of a playing event. Hold: Holds the current event s duration, allowing the event to continue to play beyond its specified duration. Let Roll: Rolls an event without switching. Play: Plays the playlist. PrgRun: Prepares a playlist for play by threading the devices in a playlist. Protect: Switches between air and protect devices. Ready: Ready the media for the Play command. Recue: Recues the playing event. RollNow: Identical to the Roll button on the software control panel. Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button plays the event. Second: The Second action allows you to roll a secondary audio/video event without specifying a starting offset for the event. This allows you to start a primary event and roll the secondary event at any time by pressing the Second button. To identify which secondary audio/video event is affected by this action, you must remove any data in the TOD field of the event. When the Second button is pressed, the next secondary audio/video event with a blank TOD is rolled. If the Second button is pressed again, the next such event, if available, rolls. The Second button will not roll any other type of secondary event and will not roll to any secondary audio/video event if its TOD field is not blank. Also, a secondary audio/video event rolls the next secondary audio/video event with TOD field information if the secondary audio/video event does not have a Rejoin qualifier. This allows you to run a list of secondary audio/video events attached to the current primary event. If the Rejoin qualifier is attached to an event, then it will not roll any other secondary audio/video events. Note: You cannot roll consecutive secondary audio/video events with the same ID for devices that play program material. Some devices, such as still stores and audio carts, use the event ID to match to the event ID name of the device. If this is the case, the ID can be the same for consecutive secondaries. Skip: Skips the playing event and proceeds to the next event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 219 of 288

220 Configuring System Properties Ten Rel: Tension releases the VTR for the next VTR event. Unthread: Unthreads lists assigned to a list button and stops on-air playout. 10. (Optional) To Rename a Button Action: Right click on a listed action entry and then from the popup menu select Rename. The Action button rename dialog appears. Rename the entry and then click OK. 11. When all buttons are properly configured click on OK the Hardware Control Panel configuration dialog. The dialog closes. 12. Click on OK in the panel select tab. The Hardware Control Panel selection dialog closes. Cabling The OCP uses a straight through DB9 RS-232 connection. To complete connection with Common Hardware Platform equipment ensure the cable terminates are female (i.e. one end of the cable with need a male to female adapter.) For more information regarding cabling requirements and pinouts reference document, ADC Cabling Standards. Setting Software Control Panel Properties Use this procedure to configure the software control panel within the Air Client application. 1. From the Air Client main menu select Properties > Software Control Panel. The Software Control Panels Configuration dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 220 of 288

221 Configuring System Properties 2. Click Edit. The Edit Available Lists dialog is displayed. To Add a List. Click Add. The Add List dialog is displayed. Specify a List Index Number. Click down arrow to select from a dropdown list of available entries. Enter a List Name When finished click OK. Returns to the Edit Available Lists dialog. To Edit a List. Select a list in the List pane and then click Edit. The Edit List dialog is displayed populated with the settings for the selected list Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 221 of 288

222 Configuring System Properties Make any necessary changes and then Click OK. Returns to the Edit Available Lists dialog. To Remove a List, select a list in the List pane and then click Remove. The list is removed. 3. When finished editing click OK on the Edit Available Lists dialog. Returns to the Software Control Panels Configuration dialog. 4. To enable buttons for a list: Select a list in the Available List pane Under Control Panel in the Enable Buttons pane, check the buttons you want enabled for the list. To disable, uncheck an entry. [Default: all entries enabled (checked)] 5. To set background color for a button: Select an enabled entry in the Enable Buttons pane. In the Background Color pane click Change Color. The Color setting dialog is displayed Select the desired color and then click OK. Returns to the Software Control Panels Configuration dialog. 6. When finished click Apply, and then click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 222 of 288

223 Configuring System Properties Valid IDs Use this procedure to create a list of IDs that are not in the database that are commonly used for air. This, in general, would include switch-only events (i.e. Network, Newsroom, Studio, Black etc.) Important Note on switch-only events with an IconMaster AuxBus: Under certain circumstances using automation with back-to-back, single-headed switch-only events, the Iconmaster AuxBus can fail to switch properly. A simple alternative solution is to configure a two-headed switch-only device in situations where back-to-back switch-only primaries are accompanied by Switcher Crosspoint (sxp) events. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Valid IDs. The Valid IDs dialog is displayed. 2. To Add an ID. Click Add. The add ID box is displayed. Enter and ID and then click OK. 3. To Edit an ID. Select an ID from the IDs list pane and then click Edit. The edit ID box is displayed populated with the ID of the selected ID. Make any necessary changes and then click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 223 of 288

224 Configuring System Properties 4. To Remove and ID select an ID from the IDs list pane and then click Remove. The ID is removed. 5. When finished click OK. List Names Use this procedure to configure (add, remove, or customize) names of transmission lists that will appear in View List [under Resources]. The default is to display only a number for the separate transmission lists at your facility (i.e. play list 1, play list 2) and secondary lists such as Record Lists, Media Lists, and Compile Lists. IMPORTANT: Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in command line parameters on the application s desktop shortcut. Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client. With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server. For more information see, Create a Desktop Shortcut for Air Client. 1. From the main menu select Properties > List Names. The List Names dialog is displayed. 2. To Add a Configured List: Click Add The Choose List dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 224 of 288

225 Configuring System Properties Select a list from the Available Lists pane and then click OK. The List Name box is displayed. Enter a name for the list and then click OK. The list is added to the Configured Lists pane. 3. To Edit a Configured List: Select a list from the Configured Lists pane and then click Edit. The List Name box is displayed populated with the name of the selected list. Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The list name is changed on the Configured Lists pane. 4. To Remove a Configured list select an ID from the Configured List pane and then click Remove. The list is removed. 5. When finished click OK. Auto List Save To enable Auto List Save add the applicable lists using this menu. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Auto List Save. The Auto List Save dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 225 of 288

226 Configuring System Properties 2. To Add a Enabled List: Click Add The Choose List dialog is displayed. Select a list from the Available Lists pane and then click OK. The Save Options dialog displayed. Configure the following parameters as required: Save Lookahead: (Default: enabled) Check to enable save of the list lookahead only. RECOMMENDATION: NEVER USE THIS, always choose SAVE FULL to prevent on-air problems later Save Full: Check to enable save of the full list Save Frequency: (Default: 10) Specify the number of changes required before a list save is initiated. This is the value of how many events go by NOT how many edits are performed. Save Directory: Specify the save directory for the saved list. (Click to browse for location. RECOMMENDATION: It is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that subfolders be created within the normal default Playlist folders for each Transmission List s Recovery List to be stored. This way, Operators, if they want to Load from this file, can find it more easily. Click OK. The list is added to the Enabled Lists pane Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 226 of 288

227 Configuring System Properties 3. To Edit a Configured List: Select a list from the Configured Lists pane and then click Edit. The List Save Options dialog is displayed populated with the settings for the selected list. Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The list save parameters are updated. 4. To Remove an Enabled list select a list from the Enabled List pane and then click Remove. The list is removed. 5. When finished click OK. Auto Bin Save Use this procedure to configure the save of bin storage map of a cart machine based on user specified intervals. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Auto Bin Save. The Auto Bin Save dialog is displayed. 2. Configure the following parameters as required: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 227 of 288

228 Configuring System Properties Enable Auto Bin Saving: Check to enable save. Hold Time: Specify the hold time in seconds. (Default: 30) Save Directory: Specify the save directory for the Auto Bin. (Click to browse for location. 3. When finished click OK. Error Reporting Properties You can configure the way errors are reported in the error window. Use this procedure to configure how/where error messages are displayed and whether they will sound out when they occur. 1. Choose a transmission list from the server from the Choose Server dialog box and click OK. NOTE: Error log files are named the same, regardless of which server originated the file. If you are using multiple servers, you need to specify different directories for each server so that the error logs do not overwrite each other. 2. From the main menu select Properties > Errors. The Error Configuration dialog is displayed. 3. Configure Log and Display: Log Errors to Disk: When enabled (checked), all errors will be written to a file in a directory specified by the Error Log Directory: field Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 228 of 288

229 Configuring System Properties Pop Up User Notifications: Check to enable. When running certain types of cart machines in manual mode, you may be prompted for manual interaction. Sound Errors: Check to enable. Plays an alert sound, or exclamation, when errors occur. It repeats until the error is acknowledged using F4. The exclamation sound plays every one second, so a sound with a duration greater than one second will be clipped. About Map.WAV sounds: Use the Windows Sounds control panel to map.wav files to specific occurrences in Air Client. 4. Configure List Errors: Open Lists: When selected, shows list errors only when a transmission list is open. All Lists: When selected, displays all list errors even if no transmission lists are open. 5. Configure Device Errors: Owned Devices: When selected, shows device errors only when the transmission list that controls the device is open. All Devices: When selected, displays all device errors even if the transmission list that controls the device is not open. 6. Configure Timezone: (Default: none) Specify the timezone for the list and error. Click the down arrow to select from a list of available timezones. 7. Configure System Errors: Notify: When enabled (checked), system errors display alert dialog boxes. System errors include the loss of reference video or timecode on the server. 8. Configure Error Log Directory: Click the Browse button (...) to specify the directory the error logs will be written to. 9. Configure Font and Colors for the message displayed at the bottom of the window of the Air Client software when an error message is active and inactive. In the Active group, the user defines how the error message is displayed when it is just generated. The Foreground and Background buttons open the standard color dialog box that allows to configure the foreground and background colors of the error message. When the Bold option is checked, the error message uses a bold font. When the Blink is checked, the error message blinks, the colors of the foreground and background invert. This makes the error message 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 229 of 288

230 Configuring System Properties Example: New Generated Error Message When the error message is generated, it is displayed as it was previously configured in the Active group of the Error Configuration dialog box. In the Inactive group, the user defines how the error message is displayed when it is acknowledged. The Foreground and Background buttons open the standard color dialog box that allows to configure the foreground and background colors of the error message. When the Bold option is checked, the error message uses a bold font. Example: Acknowledged Error Message When an Air Client software user clicks on F4 button or presses the key F4 to acknowledge the error message, it is displayed as it was previously configured in the Inactive group of the Error Configuration dialog box. 10. When finished click OK. About Errors in Multi-Login Mode In multi-login mode, a different configuration is possible for the errors coming from each Device Server Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 230 of 288

231 Configuring System Properties By a specific color configuration for active error message coming from a given Device Server, the operator can easily know which Device Server is concerned. Desktop Display Properties Use this procedure to adjust the desktop background color and wallpaper within the Air Client program. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Desktop...The Desktop Properties dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 231 of 288

232 Configuring System Properties 2. In the Background area of the Desktop Properties dialog box, click the Color: button and choose a new background color from the palette. 3. (Optional) Use the Windows standard Wallpaper area to apply wallpaper to the background. Select from the list of available wallpapers or Browse to locate. Select to Tile or Center the wallpaper. 4. When finished click Apply, then OK. Saving the Desktop Window configuration can be saved by clicking Save Desktop on the Properties menu. Using this option ensures window configuration appears exactly as saved every time Air Client is launched. LinkList LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. Once playlists are linked, changes made to the master playlist in content or event order are mirrored by linked lists, ensuring that all associated events are synchronized. When the functionality has been purchased, you can custom configure a Linked Lists. For information on the Linked List feature see section: LinkList, presented earlier in this document. For information on the operation and configuration of this feature see the ADC LinkList Reference document. More Info When the functionality has been purchased, you can custom configure a More Info column using an ODBC database. Using More Info feature is a two-step process. The customer uses station-defined procedures to configure the functionality on this display. The first step in the process is adding the field(s) to be displayed in the More Info Window to a table in the automation database, which is done using the SQL Server Management Studio, a server based application. However, to add fields, administrator access to the PC on which the Microsoft SQL Server software is installed is required. The second step in the process is creating the corresponding field(s) in the More Info Window. Information on displaying the More Info Window is presented earlier in this document. Reference Note: MoreInfo is an option to Air Client and Media Client. For details on installing and configuring this feature, please reference the ADC MoreInfo Feature Reference. For more information contact your Automation Sales representative Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 232 of 288

233 Configuring System Properties Hide Secondary Event Keys In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine Primary event (Note: Does not apply for preview played events), and for the Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing). The display filtering setting for the Secondary events of non-playing Primary events can be configured for Playlist also. The activation of these 2 secondary events display filterings is configurable per List (in multi-login mode also). For both cases, it is possible to configure the Secondary events to hide: Per Sec criteria (sav, sgpi, ****, ), new saxp events to manage Per ID criteria (Extended Ids managed), And per Type criteria (P, T, S, A, R, ). It is possible to combine these criteria. For instance: Hide any Comment with blank type, but show any Comment with R or P type. Hide any sav (whatever the ID and Type is). Hide any sav with ID LOGO, and show all other sav. Show any skey or stranskey. Manual hiding/showing of secondary events is still available for hidden secondary events, per event (icon in event number column), or for the whole list. IMPORTANT: When secondary events are hidden, if an event or block of events are highlighted and then deleted, the hidden events within the selection are also deleted. Configuration of the Hide Secondary Event keys Use this procedure to define the Hide Secondary Event keys that will be used in the Lists / Playlist properties to define the secondary event to hide. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Hide Secondary Event Keys. The Hide Secondary Event Keys dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 233 of 288

234 Configuring System Properties 2. To Add a Key: Click Add. The Hide Secondary Event Key setup dialog is displayed. Specify the following parameters: Key: Use spin arrows to set key number Key name: Enter a name for the key Sec (Event Type): Three fields. Field 1: A combo box similar to the one of Secondary event edition tool, listing all the supported secondary event types, allows user to choose the Secondary event type condition. Field 2: A combo box allows to set if the condition is complemented ( Complement is displayed in the filed) or not (the filed is blank). Field 3: A combo box allows to set if the condition is enabled ( Enabled is displayed in the field) or disabled ( Disabled displayed in the field). Type (Event Control): Three fields. Field 1: This field is directly editable to write the event type (P, T, S, PT, A, R, blank, ). If the field is blank and the condition is enabled, this is a valid criteria. Field 2: A combo box allows to set if the condition is complemented ( Complement is displayed in the filed) or not (the filed is blank). Field 3: A combo box allows to set if the condition is enabled ( Enabled is displayed in the field) or disabled ( Disabled displayed in the field). ID: Three fields. Field 1: This field is directly editable to write the secondary event ID. Extended are managed. If the field is blank and the condition is enabled, this is a valid criteria. Field 2: A combo box allows to set if the condition is complemented ( Complement is displayed in the filed) or not (the filed is blank). Field 3: A combo box allows to set if the condition is enabled ( Enabled is displayed in the field) or disabled ( Disabled displayed in the field). When finished click OK. The Key is added to the list pane. 3. To Edit a Key: Select a key from the list pane and then click Edit. The Hide Secondary Event Key setup dialog is displayed and populated for the selected key Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 234 of 288

235 Configuring System Properties Make changes are required then click OK. Note: If a key used in the Hiding Secondary configuration of a List or the Playlist is modified, there will be no specific indication of this in the Hiding Secondary configuration GUI of this List or the Playlist. 4. To Remove a Key, select a key from the list pane and then click Remove. Note: If a key used in the Hiding Secondary configuration of a List or the Playlist is deleted, this key will be displayed in a specific color in the Hiding Secondary configuration GUI of this List or the Playlist. 5. When finished click OK. Toolbar Builder The Toolbar Builder allows an Air Client software user to define shortcuts, easily available from icons on the main GUI of the application. These shortcuts are grouped within toolbars. A configurable Toolbar allows an operator to call functions by a simple click on a button. A specific configuration menu allows building the different Toolbar Groups, by associating a function with a bitmap for each button Access to the Toolbar Builder resource, which is used to administrate the toolbars available for the users, is granted to the administrator login only. Therefore, the Toolbar Builder command from the Properties menu is enabled or grayed depending of the current login of the user. Use this procedure to configure the Air Client Toolbar on the desktop. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Toolbar Builder. The Toolbar Builder dialog is displayed. The Toolbar Builder dialog box displays the toolbars that have already been created and allows to define and modify the content of a selected toolbar Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 235 of 288

236 Configuring System Properties Dialog components: The Toolbar group displays the list of the toolbars what have already been created. The Add button allows to create a new toolbar (this is the first step in the toolbar creation). It opens the following dialog box to enter the toolbar name that will be used to identify the toolbar. If the user enters the name of a toolbar that is already existing, an error message is displayed. The Delete button is used to delete the selected toolbar. The user is prompted to confirm before deleting the toolbar. The Rename button is used to rename the selected toolbar and it opens the Toolbar name dialog box. If the user enters the name of a toolbar that is already existing, an error message are displayed and the rename action is cancelled. The Move up and Move down buttons modify the order of the toolbars in the list. The name of the toolbars are displayed in the View menu according to this order. The Edit button is used to opens the Shortcuts Setting dialog box that is used to define the toolbar shortcuts. 2. To Add a toolbar: Click Add. The Toolbar name box is displayed. Enter name for the toolbar in the name box and then click OK. The new toolbar is added to the toolbar group. Note: If required, the application allows a blank name for a toolbar group. Edit the toolbar parameters 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 236 of 288

237 Configuring System Properties 3. To Edit a toolbar: Select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Edit. The Shortcuts Settings dialog is displayed. The Shortcuts Setting dialog box displays the shortcuts associated with a toolbar, and allows to add, edit, remove and organize these shortcuts into the toolbar. Image size: Height and Width: The Height and Width values allow the administrator to set the image size that can be loaded for that toolbar. The images, to associate with shortcuts, are bitmap files and they must have the same size as configured otherwise an error message will be displayed. When the first image is loaded, Height and Width options are locked and cannot be modified no more. System Configuration rights to change View: Check to enable or uncheck to disable. When checked, this toolbar is grayed in the View menu for nonadministrator logins, so only the administrator logins are granted to add or remove that toolbar into the Air Client GUI. Toolbar Buttons: This list displays the images chosen to represent the toolbar shortcuts and the order to display them in the toolbar. To add buttons click Add. A browse window opens for locating a bitmap file that will be represented a toolbar shortcut. To delete buttons, select a button and then click Delete. The user is prompted to confirm before deleting the image. To modify the order of buttons on the toolbar, select a button from the Toolbar Buttons pane and then click Move Left (to move the entry left on the toolbar), Move Right (to move the entry right on the toolbar). Button Properties: This group displays information about the selected shortcut. To select a shortcut, the user selects the bitmap, in the Toolbar buttons that will be represented by it. Select a button graphic in the Toolbar Buttons pane. The user can choose or modify the associated function by selecting one in the list of functions and by clicking on Select button. The bitmap is displayed. Function: The function name is transcribed in Function edit. Highlight a function in the Available functions pane and then click < to select Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 237 of 288

238 Configuring System Properties Hint: Specify a tooltip popup for the function. The user can modify the hint to be displayed for that shortcut in the Hint edit. By default, Hint is equal to the function name. When finished click OK. 4. To position a toolbar in the list and for display select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Move Up (to move the entry up in the list), Move Down (to move the entry down in the list). The position in the list determines the display sequence (right to left) of the toolbars on the main screen. 5. To Rename a toolbar: Select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Rename. The Toolbar name box is displayed. Enter new name in the name box and then click OK. 6. To Delete a toolbar, select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Delete. 7. When finished click OK Configuring Time Zone Offsets Use this procedure to configure a unique time zone offset for each play list that is offset from the house clock. This means it is possible to define Time Zones with offsets compared to the Time Code reference used by the Device Servers, and to set a Time Zone to a given List. The Time Zone set to a List will be displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its Zoom window. The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List. To setup TimeZone Offsets 1. From the main menu select Properties>Time Zone. The Timezones dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 238 of 288

239 Configuring System Properties 2. To add a Timezone and Offset. Click Zone List tab Click Add. A Time Zone dialog is displayed. In the Time Zone dialog specify a name for the timezone and an offset (+ or hh:mm:ss:ff) down to frame level. When finished Click OK (Option) Use Edit button to edit a currently defined Timezone and Offset. (Option) Use Remove button to remove a currently defined Timezone and Offset Note: A pop-up warning appears when an operator attempts to Edit or Remove an existing time zone offset. The warning will say This change will alter the event times of all associated lists. Do you want to continue? OK or Cancel. Changing the offset time will dynamically modify the event times of all associated playlists. Example dialog with added values: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 239 of 288

240 Configuring System Properties 3. To set a Timezone to a playlist. Click Playlists tab Click Add. A Time Zone dialog is displayed. The system warns This change will alter event times in the playlist. Do you want to Continue. Click OK. In the timezone dialog specify the following: Device Server: Specify a Device Server. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of available Device Servers. List: Specify a list. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of available playlists. Time Zone: a name for the timezonet. Specify a Timezone. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of currently defined timezones. Click OK The Time Zone set to a List is displayed in the title bar of its List window, and its Zoom window. The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List. (Option) Use Edit button to edit a currently defined Timezone. (Option) Use Remove button to remove a currently defined Timezone. 4. To Set Event Movement. Click Event Movement tab 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 240 of 288

241 Configuring System Properties Select the desired Event movement behavior Always ask if offset should be applied (Default) Always apply offsets on move Never apply offsets on move 5. When finished click OK Operation Log Use this procedure to create a log to track operation activity within the Air Client application. 1. From the main menu select Properties > Operation Log. The Operation Log dialog is displayed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 241 of 288

242 Configuring System Properties 2. Enable operation log: Check to enable logging 3. Action Categories: Use arrow keys to select the action categories to be logged. Move options from Action Categories pane to Action Categories logged pane. Use the move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries. >: Move a single entry from Action Categories pane to Action Categories logged pane >>: Move all entries from Action Categories pane to Action Categories logged pane <: Move a single entry from Action Categories logged pane back to Action Categories pane <<: Move all entries from Action Categories logged pane back to Action Categories pane 4. Other Options: Start of Day: Specify the start of day hh:mm:ss Operation log Directory: Specify the directory. Click the Browse button ( ) to locate. Days to Keep: Specify the number of days to keep the log before deleting. 5. Time: Select the time to use: Station or Device Server. 6. When finished click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 242 of 288

243 Configuring System Properties Set Tally Use this procedure to configure Air client to use the Tally information of a given List to display an On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom window(s) status column. When a Tally is configured for a given List, If it is seen as On Air according to the Tally configuration, then the On Air color and ON AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom window, If it is seen as On Line according to the Tally configuration, the On Line color and ON LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window. To Set a Tally 1. From the main menu select Properties > Set Tally. The Set tally dialog is displayed. A Scroll bar appears on the left of the list if all the Tally configured cannot be displayed at the same time in the GUI. Note: If user is not logged in with System Configuration permission, the corresponding configuration window is opened with the Add, Remove, Edit, OK and Apply buttons grayed, and only the Cancel and Help buttons active. 2. To Add a Tally: Click Add. The Add Tally Configuration dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to set which input of which GPI board is corresponding to which List of which Device Server (multi-login management) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 243 of 288

244 Configuring System Properties Specify the parameters listed for the tally: Device Server: Allows to choose between the Device Server name of the Available Device Servers list in Multi-Login, or for the current Device Server Name if not in Multi-Login. Initial value (when Add used) : None (displayed <Server Name>) List n*: Allows to set the concerned List number of the Device Server selected. The Lists of the Configured Device Server which have already a Tally configured on this Air Client are not displayed or accessible in the combo box. Values in combo box: 1 to 16, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank. Initial value (when Add used): 0. GPI board number & Input number: Allow to set which Input of which GPI board receives the Tally signal of the List configured with Device Server & List parameters. It is active immediately. GPI board no. allows to select one the GPI boards installed on the station (detected by the driver). Values in combo box: 1 to 4, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank. Initial value (when Add used) : 0. Input number: Set the concerned GPI input number of the GPI board selected. Values from 1 to 8, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank. Initial value (when Add used) : 0. The min and max values displayed in the combo box (except 0 value) could be retrieved automatically from the dll interfacing the Air Client with the GPI board (if this solution is used). OnAir/OnLine Status&Color: Values: YES or NO. If set to YES, the On Air / On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding List and Zoom Window are activated. If set to NO, the On Air/On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding List and Zoom Window not activated (Standard PLAY status and color). Initial value (when Add used) : NO On Air value: Values: 0 or 1. Allows to determine which GPI logical value (0 or 1) is corresponding to the OnAir status of the selected List. Initial value (when Add used) : 0 Current value: This is not a parameter. It shows the value currently applied to the configured GPI input. The field is blanked until a Server/List and GPI board/gp Input are configured. When finished click OK. Closes the Tally Configuration window, and applies the settings to the Tally table of the Set Tally window. Note: A line added, and not configured is not added to the Tally table. 3. To Edit a configured Tally: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 244 of 288

245 Configuring System Properties Select an entry on the Tally configured pane and then click Edit. The Configuration dialog is displayed and populated with the parameters for the selected tally. It is possible to select one Tally line only in the Tally table. Use this dialog to set which input of which GPI board is corresponding to which List of which Device Server (multi-login management). Edit the parameters listed for the tally: Device Server: Allows to choose between the Device Server name of the Available Device Servers list in Multi-Login, or for the current Device Server Name if not in Multi-Login. Initial value (when Add used) : None (displayed <Server Name>) List n*: Allows to set the concerned List number of the Device Server selected. The Lists of the Configured Device Server which have already a Tally configured on this Air Client are not displayed or accessible in the combo box. Values in combo box: 1 to 16, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank. Initial value (when Add used): 0. GPI board number & Input number: Allow to set which Input of which GPI board receives the Tally signal of the List configured with Device Server & List parameters. It is active immediately. GPI board no. allows to select one the GPI boards installed on the station (detected by the driver). Values in combo box: 1 to 4, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank. Initial value (when Add used) : 0. Input number: Set the concerned GPI input number of the GPI board selected. Values from 1 to 8, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank. Initial value (when Add used) : 0. The min and max values displayed in the combo box (except 0 value) could be retrieved automatically from the dll interfacing the Air Client with the GPI board (if this solution is used). OnAir/OnLine Status&Color: Values: YES or NO. If set to YES, the On Air / On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding List and Zoom Window are activated. If set to NO, the On Air/On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding List and Zoom Window not activated (Standard PLAY status and color). Initial value (when Add used) : NO On Air value: Values: 0 or Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 245 of 288

246 Configuring System Properties Allows to determine which GPI logical value (0 or 1) is corresponding to the OnAir status of the selected List. Initial value (when Add used) : 0 Current value: This is not a parameter. It shows the value currently applied to the configured GPI input. The field is blanked until a Server/List and GPI board/gp Input are configured. When finished click OK. Closes the Tally Configuration window, and applies the settings to the Tally table of the Set Tally window. 4. To Remove a tally. Select an entry on the Tally configured pane and then click Remove. A warning dialog appears requesting confirmation. Select OK to remove the selected Tally from the table. Select Cancel to keep the selected Tally and not remove it from the table. 5. When finished click Apply and then click OK Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 246 of 288

247 Appendix A Appendix A Event Type Field Values There are several event types you can use to indicate how an event is played. For example, if you just want an event to play without switching or threading, you would choose Play (P) as the primary event type. The event type letter can be typed into the event type column of a play list or transmission list. The primary event types are: Play (P). An event will play without switching or threading. Switch (S). An event will switch without threading or playing. Thread (T). An event will thread without switching or playing. A = Auto. An event will switch, play and thread. Auto is the default setting for most primary events. Alternatively, a PT (play and thread) can be used to play and thread, but not switch. The A will be required for certain event types to ensure the event executes correctly. R = Record. A record event initiates recording on a device at the time specified in the event s time field. See Recording O = Timed. Denotes that the event is a hard start event which automatically threads and plays at the time specified in the event s Time field. This event type will need to be added to an A event type to execute correctly (AO). U = Up-counting. Use an up-count event for an event of unknown duration, such as a sporting event or any other live broadcast. During playout, the event s duration will count down to 00:00:00.00 and then will count back up. This repeats until terminated by either pressing Play or Skip on the control panel or a contact start is reached. The next event will play normally. Up counters only work on events played from Switch-Only devices. This event type will need to be added to an A event type to execute correctly (AU). AUO = Up-counting with hardstart. Is used when an up-count event is required to run at a pre-designated hard start or absolute time. Once this event type plays it acts as an up-count event as described above. Manual Start (M). Use a manual start event to provide the equivalent of a break event during the transmission of a play list. When playing, a list will stop when it reaches a manual start event. Click Play on the control panel. AUM = Manual Start with Up-count. This event type combination is a manual start as described above but with an up-count event type added to allow the event to be run as an upcount event once it starts playing. X = Exception. This is a customized primary event in configurations that have a primary program channel and regional feeds to play different commercials to different regions Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 247 of 288

248 Appendix A Exception events are different on a regional feed from those played on the primary program channel. X is only used on a compile tape. N = Time to Next. Enter a letter N in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide a countdown to the event s start time. This is used primarily on live events so an operator can give an accurate countback from a break back into a live event, such as a newscast. AUN = Time to Next with Up-count. This combination will allow a countdown to the live (upcount) event it is attached to. D = Deadroll. A deadroll event hard starts at a specific time while the list plays. The deadroll event plays, but does not switch, for its duration and then stops. Be advised this event type requires that the letter D be added to an AO for it to play correctly. The operator will need to manually switch to this event type for it to be switched On Air. If the deadroll event is switched On Air then the first event following the deadroll will need to be a hard start event type to get the automation back on time and in full automation. Audio/Video Breakaway (AV, AI, AVJ, AIJ). A primary event or a secondary audio/video event can be run and cause the switcher to perform an audio/video breakaway. AV is an event type that performs a video breakaway. AI performs audio breakaways. To rejoin the secondary audio/video breakaway to the primary audio/video input when it finishes playing, edit the event type to AVJ or AIJ. A breakaway event can occur at the beginning, within and the end of its associated primary event. When used at the beginning or end, the primary event type is set to A; the secondary event type is set to AV or AI. If the duration of the secondary event is less than the primary event, add a J to supply the audio and video from the primary event. When used within a primary event, the secondary event type is set to AVJ or AIJ. Note: Only one breakaway can be assigned to a primary event to avoid an overlap in time. You cannot breakaway audio and then breakaway video until the video is rejoined. Also, you cannot breakaway video and then breakaway audio until the audio is rejoined Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 248 of 288

249 Appendix B Appendix B Secondary Events Secondary events are associated with the primary event above it in the play list. Multiple secondary events can be assigned to a primary event and are played concurrently. A secondary event s time is used as an offset in relation to the primary event s time. You can edit the configuration parameters of some secondary events. When inserting an editable secondary event, a dialog box allows you to configure its attributes and settings. Editable secondary events include: GPI Contact, Back Timed GPI, Keyer On/Off, Transition Key, Audio Over On/Off, Transition Audio Over, External and Data Event with Data. To access an editable secondary event already in a play To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary event already in a play list, 1. Click on the event s number. 2. From the main menu select Events > Edit Secondary. Secondary Switching Parameter (ssp) The secondary switching parameter contains values depending on the event type. For primary and secondary Audio/Video events, the value is the audio modes, mono and stereo. By default, the audio mode is stereo. The value is initially set in a media prep product, such as Media Client, for the Audio Format database field. It can be modified in Air Client by clicking an event and entering S or M in the ssp field in Revise mode (ALT + R). For secondary key and secondary audio over events, the value ranges from 1 to 9. The number corresponds to a keyer or mixer channel number on the master control switcher Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 249 of 288

250 Appendix B Secondary Audio/Video (sav) The secondary Audio/Video Audio Over event is used to add another A/V audio source over the primary audio/video source. The A/V audio over source may replace the primary A/V audio source or be mixed with it. A secondary Audio/Video Audio Over event plays material, in addition to the primary event on air, for use in effects such as keys, audio overs and mixes. When inserting a new secondary audio/video event in a play list, play (P) and thread (T), but not auto (A), are entered into the Type field. Switching is not used for this event. The event can be used to produce the audio/video over for a key/audio over input to a master control switcher or as an audio/video breakaway. To switch the switcher An A/V event may be run to switch the switcher. To do this, enter an A, instead of a P or T, in the Type field. The secondary event will begin with an audio-follow video transition. Back Timed Secondary Audio/Video (bav) The Back Timed A/V (backtimed secondary audio/video) event is the same as a Secondary Audio/Video, except the secondary s on-air time is the amount of time before the primary event will begin. (i.e. The offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event.) In the event Type field, these events are inserted with types P and T (but not A). No switching is done on these events, unless this is changed. These events can be used as a key/audio over inputs to a master control switcher. It is possible to associate a switching event with a back timed event. To do this, change the Type field to A. This event starts with an audiofollow-video transition. Note: Backtimed events cannot be run after up-counting events. GPI Contact (sgpi) A GPI contact closure secondary event controls the contact closure on a GPI card. The Device Server must have the optional GPI card. For each event, an on time (offset) and duration value must be entered. An offset indicates how long after the start of the primary event the contact closure should occur Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 250 of 288

251 Appendix B The duration value sets the duration of the pulse or length of closure of the contact. The offset is entered in the event s on-air field and duration in the DUR field. The GPI closure may be longer than the associated primary event. Note: The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time. GPI Contact dialog In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client: Back Timed GPI (bgpi) A Backtimed GPI is similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before the start of the associated primary event. A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In this case, the system would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event. Back Timed GPI dialog In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 251 of 288

252 Appendix B Keyer On/Off (skey) A Keyer On/Off event allows events to have an offset from the beginning of the event to be specified. Define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated primary event s video output and is filled with the output of the Keyer source. The task performed by the key depends on the capabilities of the device you are using. This function will only be performed if the primary event s A/V Switching data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher. Key Event dialog In this window, the following parameters can be set: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 252 of 288

253 Appendix B Modifier. This parameter specifies how the key source is outlined. The options are normal, shadow, drop shadow and border. Source. The key fill s source. When self is selected, the fill input both cuts and fills the hole. When external is selected, the key input cuts the hole and fill input fills it in. When chroma is selected, the key is determined by the colors of the background video. Matte. When selected, fill input is replaced by a matte source. The matte source color is determined by the mixer controls. Key Hold. When selected, this option will keep the keyer on through subsequent primary transitions. On Time. This will determine the start time of the keyer event. This option determines how long after the start of the primary event the key is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the key will arrive late. Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00: Duration. Determines the length of time the key is overlaid. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next event s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. In order to have the key last as long as the primary event, make the duration field blank. The duration of the keyer event can either be blank, or specified as equal or greater than to: the duration of the primary minus the secondary's (normal) offset the duration of the primary plus the secondary's back timed offset the duration of the secondary's end-timed offset The keyer can be removed by the End Key Hold function. Speed and Effect. The speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located above the time fields. Effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut. Key. Specifies which key source to use. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next event s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. Also, it is not possible to have two transitions overlapping in time; however, you can associate two keys with the same event as long as you set their on time and duration so they do not overlap. A/V Keyer On/Off The secondary Audio/Video Keyer event is used to add an A/V Keyer source over the primary audio/video source. The A/V Keyer source may replace the primary audio/video source or be mixed with it Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 253 of 288

254 Appendix B Transition Keyer A transition keyer secondary event is similar to Keyer On/Off, except that the keyer is brought up at the start of its associated primary event with the same transition type as that of the primary. This type of secondary event has a configuration dialog box similar to Keyer On/Off; however, for the transition key, the value of the offset cannot be set. It is possible to define a transition key event so it lasts as long as the primary event. To do this, make the duration field blank. If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an ordinary secondary keyer event. Transition Keyer dialog In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client: To define a transition key event to last as long as the primary event make the duration field blank. If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an ordinary secondary keyer event. Audio Over On/Off (saov) The Audio Over secondary event is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source. The audio over source may replace the primary audio source or be mixed with it. To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the duration field blank. Audio Over dialog In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 254 of 288

255 Appendix B Audio Over. The number of the audio input line on the mixer. Ratio. The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary sources) to 99 (all audio over source). Speed and Effect. The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut. On Time. This determines the start position of the event and how long after the start of the primary event the audio is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the event arrives late; however, you may use the Transition Audio Over to restart the audio when the primary event beings. Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00: Duration. Determines the length of time the event is overlaid. The event is only performed if the primary event s A/V Data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher. Transition Audio Over (stao) The secondary Transition Audio Over allows you to specify a secondary audio event to coincide with the primary event in the same manner as a transition keyer event, as described in Keyer On/Off. This event has a set of options that are identical to the audio over on/off secondary event, except that the ontime option is missing (the ontime for a transition audio over event is set to 0). To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the duration field blank. Transition Audio Over dialog In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 255 of 288

256 Appendix B Break A break may be inserted at a point on the list where you would like the list to stop running. Events will play out normally up to this event. The first event after the Break event cues up as usual, but does not play and the program switches to black. To restart a list after a break, click Play on the control panel. This list may also begin if a GPI contact input is used or if preroll is initiated on a hard start event that is next on the list. Comment (****) Use this secondary event to enter notes into the play list. Comments are ignored during transmission. Any text may be inserted into the title field of a comment. Compile ID (cmid) This type of event is used to label a compilation list with an ID. The tape ID of the compile tape should be entered into the ID field Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 256 of 288

257 Appendix B Data Event (sdat) This type of secondary event is associated with a device but does not generate any video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event would be put on air, had the event been associated with a video device. For video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk server. Secondary data events are Secondary Events used to command serial devices requiring a simple command that does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event. This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is sent to the device to execute the data event command. The primary event can be any primary event for any device. The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. As an example, the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary event s title. The command, Delete From Disk, is entered as DEL:XXXXXXXX:YY. X s represent the spot ID and Y s represent the optional port value. The command, Get From Archive, is entered as GFA:XXXXXXXX:YY. The command, Delete From Archive, is entered as DFA:XXXXXXXX:YY. Note: This secondary event may work differently based on the device being used. Barter Spot (sbar) Barter spot events are associated with a primary event and are logged to the Asrun log when the primary event runs to completion and is logged. Barter spot events are treated as comments by the automation system and are not played. Barter spot is used for reconciliation with traffic systems. A barter spot is a source of audio/video that is part of another audio/video source. It is not played as separate audio/video, but is treated as a comment that is passed to the as run log and to the reconciliation process. This event is attached to the primary event. When the primary event finishes running it is logged to the as run log. These events appear in the text Asrun log as Barter in the status field. In the enterprise traffic log for example, they appear as BTR in the program type field. The appearance of the spots in the logs does not positively indicate the spots have run. If the primary event runs, the spots are logged; however, the spots may not have actually been on the primary material Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 257 of 288

258 Appendix B Record Switcher (srsw) Record switcher is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a recording, this switches to the secondary event s source. The name of the source to switch to is entered in the title field. This name must also be in the source name table for the switcher that is supplying the video to the record device. The event is only performed if the primary event s device has the A/V data parameters configured to specify the switcher number that has the matching name in its source name table. Switcher Crosspoint (sxp) This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. While an event plays, this function switches to the secondary event s source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple crosspoints during one primary event. The name of the new source:destination is entered in the title field. Use the format SRC,DEST where SRC is the name of the source and DEST, the destination. You may enter a maximum of 16 characters for the title and the name you enter must also be defined in the switcher s device parameter field for Source Name and/or Destination Name for the switcher that is controlling the output for the primary event. This type of event requires that the primary device have the specified switcher device configured for its switching information. If the secondary event does not specify the source (title =, DEST), the input crosspoint must be specified in the primary event s device for the secondary event to default the destination. Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT) This is a secondary event similar to a switcher crosspoint event - that performs extra switching for audio outputs. While an event plays, this function switches to the secondary event s audio source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple audio crosspoints during one primary event. When selected for logging, the logging is done at zero crossing of the primary event. When Switcher Audio Crosspoint is selected in the configuration, and the Control Audio Mode option is selected in the configuration: The Secondary Switching Parameter (ssp) field is neglected. A new secondary event Switcher Audio Crosspoint is used for the audio routing (shuffling) Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 258 of 288

259 Appendix B If a Switcher Audio Crosspoint secondary event is not attached to the primary, default values are applied for routing as per the configuration. Format of Title field: x1 x2 x3 x4 x1 to x4 are input values for output 1 to 4 X1 to x4 = 1 to 4. If any of the input (x1 to x4) is not valid, it is replaced by its default (Configuration) value. If 2 or more Switcher Audio Crosspoint secondary events are found (resulting from an editing mistake), only the first one is taken into consideration. Note: Audio routing is done on the device specified in the ID field, if valid. If ID field is not valid then audio routing is done on the primary event to which the secondary Switcher Audio Crosspoint is attached. When the next event is preset, its corresponding cross point is normalized to the default as specified in the configuration, provided the next event audio crosspoint is not the same as the current event. Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT) This is a secondary event similar to a switcher crosspoint event - that performs extra switching for audio outputs. While an event plays, this function switches to the secondary event s audio source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple audio crosspoints during one primary event. When selected for logging, the logging is done at zero crossing of the primary event. Secondary Record (srec) This type of secondary event allows for the automatic recording and segmenting of live program material for immediate playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event is used in a list that combines record and playback activities. A secondary record event is attached to each primary event that is being recorded. Break Sync (ssyn) Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a time for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 259 of 288

260 Appendix B This event is normally be used on a list that contains only pods/breaks of commercials. The pods are: Separated by either an upcount event or by this Break sync event. Triggered to run by an external contact closure (GPI) or by clicking Play on the control panel. In normal operation, a contact closure/play button is detected and the next pod on the list is played. The break sync event is marked DONE immediately. The pod plays out until either an upcount event, break sync event or the end of the list is encountered. If the next pod has not played by the time of day specified on its break sync event, plus its deviation, the automation sends out a user notification to all automation clients. The event then waits for the opportunity time for a client to respond to the notification. If no response is received at the end of this time, the automation marks each event in the pod and the break sync event as being missed. It stops marking events as missed when it encounters an upcounting event or break sync event. If the list was running an upcount event, that event is skipped and the next upcount event runs. During the time the automation is waiting when the break sync occurs, the user notification is sent to all clients. One or more clients are enabled to detect the user notification. The enabled clients display a dialog box prompting the operator to click OK to Delete Pod and Keep Pod. The dialog box is displayed only during the waiting time and will automatically close if the operator does not respond. This is the equivalent to clicking OK to Delete Pod since the list on the server will time out and mark the pod missed. If the operator clicks Keep Pod, a message is sent back to the server causing the server to mark the break sync event as done, but leaves the pod intact waiting for the contact closure/play button. There is no other user notification for this pod. If the contact closure/play button does not occur, the time of day for the break sync event for the next pod may occur. To eliminate a potential problem, the next break sync event is used to mark the previous pod missed. This occurs automatically at the time of day of the next break sync event minus its deviation time. When this occurs, all events before this event are marked missed. If the automation had been running an upcount event, then this upcounter and the next up-counter before this break sync event are terminated before this event runs. Secondary System (ssys) This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 260 of 288

261 Appendix B When this event type is run, it is able to move un-assigned device heads to the list that is running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads. This event is programmed by filling in the time, ID and title fields of the event with control information. The time field controls the time when the event will run offset from the primary event. Event IDs The following event IDs act as commands to the list: Assign. Will assign the device and head(s) specified in the title field to the transmission list the event is located in. The title format is: DEVICENAME,X,Y Where DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the head number assigned to the list and,y is the number of other heads to be assigned. Release. Will remove the device and head(s) specified in the event title field from the transmission list the event is located in and return it back to the system as an unowned device head. The title format is identical to the above described. Protect. Performs a protect assignment on the device and head(s) to the device specified in the type field. The title format is: PROTECTNAME, DEVICENAME,X,Y Where PROTECTNAME is the name of the device that is to be protected. DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the head number assigned to the list, and Y is the number of other heads to be assigned. You must first have assigned the primary device heads to the list before assigning the protect heads. A space character may be substituted for the comma in any of the title field commands. Backtimed System (bsys) This secondary event works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event type runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field. System Event This secondary event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignments during the execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move unowned device heads to the list running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 261 of 288

262 Appendix B External (vdt) Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands or other information to a specific device on the device server. To Insert an External secondary even When you insert this secondary event, a dialog box opens that prompts you for the data you want to send to a device. Normally, the dialog box is a text editor window, but if there is a special.dll file for the device, this may vary. 1. Enter the data you want to send to a device on the network in the text editor. 2. After clicking OK, Air Client inserts a line in the play list or transmission window and enters into Revise mode. 3. Enter the device ID name in the Id field. vdt is inserted in the Sec field. 4. To exit Revise mode, press <ALT+R> or from the main menu select Events > Revise. Data Event with Data (sdat) Use this event to send commands and other information to a specific device on the device server. To Insert a Data Event with Data When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor, to enter the commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 262 of 288

263 Appendix B 1. Enter the data you want to send in the text editor. 2. After clicking OK, Air Client inserts a line in the play list or transmission window and enters into Revise mode. sdt is inserted in the Sec field. 3. To exit Revise mode, press <ALT+R> or from the main menu select Events > Revise. The time in the time field is the offset from the preroll of the associated primary event. The commands are sent to the device at the offset time Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 263 of 288

264 Appendix C Appendix C Device Error Messages Following is a list of Errors that can be generated by the ADC Device Server. Please note that the Time of Day the error occurred, the list name, as well as the Device Name precede errors. The quickest method to find your error in this document is to do a Find using only the text of the specific error message less the Time of Day, list name and if displayed, Device Name. AIR COPY REMOVED FROM EVENT - The primary copy of the media was removed or ejected, and the backup (Protect) copy became the primary copy. The media was not on-air. ANNOTATION CAUSED SHORT PROGRAM ANNOTATION MEDIA WAS EJECTED - The secondary record event was deleted. No record. ARM NOT INDEXED - The arm of the TCS90 cart. Machine is not properly indexed (not initialized or problem). ARM OFF LINE: <Error Code> - One or more cassette handler component not indexed. AUDIO DATA ERROR LEVEL NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned back an Audio Data error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on the tape the error occurred. AUDIO READ AFTER WRITE NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned back an Audio Raw Verify error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on the tape the error occurred. Audio-over number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio Over. Audio-over number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio Over. AXIS OFF LINE - The arm cannot move in the axis (not initialized or problem). BAD BARCODE READ ON BIN: <Bin Number> - The barcode reader in the cart machine has detected a label on the tape, but cannot properly read it. BARCODE READ LOST - An unknown error occurred in a cart machine when trying to read the barcode label on a tape. BARCODE READER ERROR - An error occurred with the barcode reader. BIN: <Bin Number> IN USE BY VTR <Error Code> - BIN assigned to multiple tape Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 264 of 288

265 Appendix C CACHING FAILURE-CHECK EVENT:<ID> List <Error Code> - Impossible to make a cache request. The ID of the media seems bad. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> COMMAND FORMAT ERROR - Bad format of the command sent to the cart machine. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> ILLEGAL COMMAND ID - Unknown command ID. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUFFER FULL - Cart machine buffer is full. Impossible to run the command. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy, the command will not run. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER - Cart command contained invalid parameters. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER <ErrorCode> - Bad command parameters sent to the cart machine. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER <ErrorCode> - Bad command parameters sent to the cart machine. CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER <ErrorCode> - Bad command parameters sent to the cart machine. CART ERROR ON BARCODE READER COMMAND - Problem with a barcode reader command. CART ERROR ON MISCELLANEOUS COMMAND - Message for every kind of errors (MISCELLANEOUS). CART ERROR ON ROBOT COMMAND - Problem with a robot command. CART ERROR ON VTR COMMAND - Problem with a VTR command. CART JARRED - Attempted a movement command while the emergence stop switch is activated. CART MALFUNCTION - <IDC_Format_OdeticCart> - General problem in the odetics carts. CART OTHER MALFUNCTION - M<ErrorCode> NO TIMECODE - There is no timecode reference in the cart machine. CART OTHER MALFUNCTION - M<ErrorCode> TIMECODE ERROR - Timecode error with the cart machine. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - BAD BARCODE READ ON BIN: <ErrorCode> - The barcode reader in the cart machine has detected a label on the tape, but cannot properly read it. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Abnormal End - The command wan abnormally finished. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Abnormal End - The command was abnormally finished. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - Device connected but offline Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 265 of 288

266 Appendix C CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR - The robot responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR - The robot responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR - The robot responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR - The robot responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DOOR IS OPEN - The door of the robot is open. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> EJECT TIMEOUT - Eject command didn't run on time in a robot. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> EJECT TIMEOUT - Eject command didn't run on time in a robot. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> UNINITIALIZED - Robot not initialized. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> UNINITIALIZED - Robot not initialized. CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Unknown Robot Error - The robot returned an unknown problem. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> CAN NOT CANCEL - Impossible to cancel the VTR command. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - Cancel of a VTR command. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - Cancel of a VTR command. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - VTR command was cancelled. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error between the VTR and the Device server. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error from a VTR in the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error from a VTR in the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error from a VTR in the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - Device connected but offline. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - VTR connected but offline. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - VTR from a VTR in the cart machine is off line. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE WENT INTO LOCAL - The remote control from the VTR in the cart machine is not able Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 266 of 288

267 Appendix C CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> HARDWARE ERROR - Hardware error for a VTR in the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> HARDWARE ERROR - Hardware error for the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy, the VTR command is not running. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC SOFTWARE ERROR - VTR Cart machine software problem. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC SOFTWARE ERROR - VTR Cart machine software problem. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> NO RESPONSE - No answer from a VTR in the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> NO VTR - There is no VTR connected. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> REC INHIBIT - Recording impossible with a VTR in the cart machine. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> SERVO TROUBLE - Servo problem. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> TAPE TROUBLE - Problem with a tape in a VTR. CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> UNDEFINED COMMAND - Undefined command sent to a VTR in the cart machine. CASSETTE STUCK IN ELEVATOR - POSSIBLE VTR PROBLEM - The door on the cart machine is open. CHC SLIDER NOT RETRACTED - Attempted a load port command before previous stall condition cleared. COMMAND TIMED OUT, RECEIVED NO REPLY - Command got no reply. COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH CART - A Cart Machine stopped communicating over the RS422 connection. COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH DEVICE - The communication between the device server and the video server is lost. COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH DEVICE <Error Code> - A device stopped communicating over the RS422 connection. COMMUNICATIONS RESTORED WITH DEVICE - The communication between the device server and the video server is restored. COMPILE MEDIA NOT IN POSITION TO PLAY - Rollover between compile reels failed. Device Error <Device Name> - INTERNAL ERROR - RESULT BUFFER OVERRUN - The buffer of the video server is full. The command won't be run. Device Error <Device Name> SWITCHPRESET - VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - From SwitchPreset. DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Error code return for a media in the video disk. DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Specific error from the odetics cart. The errors have to be checked in the protocol of the device Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 267 of 288

268 Appendix C DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Used by video disk, do not use in diagnostic. The errors have to been checked in the protocol of the device. DEVICE DELETED SPOT: <ID> - Spot deleted from the device. Impossible to play it. DEVICE ERROR - PORT NOT VALID - Problem with a port of the video disk. DEVICE ERROR - REPORTED FROM DEVICE: <Error Code> - Error code return for the video disk. DEVICE ERROR - REPORTED FROM DEVICE: <ErrorCode> - Used by video disk, do not use in diagnostic. The errors have to been checked in the protocol of the device. DEVICE NAME NOT VALID - The major device specified by the system resource event could not be found. DEVICE NOT CUED IN TIME, HOLDING TIME:<ID> List <Error Code> - Media not cued in time in the video disk. DEVICE NOT CUED IN TIME, HOLDING TIME:<ID> List <Error Code> - Media not cued in time. DEVICE NOT IN EDIT ON - After a command to go into edit on mode, the device indicates that it is not in edit on mode. DEVICE PLAY/RECORD STATUS LATE: <ID> - Problem with the time delay of the device. DEVICE RECORDED SPOT: <ID> - Spot recorded in the device. Can be played. DEVICE RETURNED ACK - Received unexpected ack. DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR <Error Code> - A device returned either a NAK through the protocol or a problem with communications existed. DEVICE RETURNED UNEXPECTED NAK, MINOR ERROR <Error Code> - Received unexpected nak. DEVICE SENT CUE CMD: <ID> - ID in copy queue is not in spot collection. DEVICE SENT PROTECT CMD: <ID> - Record media, spot marked for cache. DEVICE SERVER LOST BACKGROUND: <Error Code> - Event pointer nil when unregistered. DEVICE SERVER REFERENCE VIDEO LOST - Reference Video missing. Shifting to PC Clock for clocking input. (Timecode also missing) DEVICE SERVER TIMECODE LOST - Reference Timecode missing. Shifting from timecode to reference video for clocking input DEVICE TIMEOUT -RETRYING COMMAND: <Error Code> - A timeout occurred when waiting for the response of a device. DEVICE WENT INTO LOCAL - The device is no longer under automation control. Communications exist, but the device will not respond to commands. DIAGNOSTIC STATUS ERROR <Error Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the diagnostic status bit set in the extended status. The minor error code has the actual error code as defined by the Sony VTR Protocol. DISK ERROR - AUDIO OVERLOAD - Problem with the configuration of the audio in the video server Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 268 of 288

269 Appendix C DISK ERROR - COMMAND NOT SUPPORTED - The video file server received a command not yet implemented. DISK ERROR - COMMAND WHILE BUSY - The video server had an error while is busy. DISK ERROR - CUE NOT DONE - The media was not cued on the right timecode. DISK ERROR - DISK IS FULL, RECORD FAILED - The video disk server is full. No recording. DISK ERROR - ID ALREADY EXISTS: <ID> - ID already exist in the video server. Message for a record. DISK ERROR - ID DELETE PROTECTED: <ID> - ID protected, do not delete from the video server. DISK ERROR - ID NOT FOUND: <ID> - The media in the video server is not in the device storage. DISK ERROR - ID STILL PLAYING: <ID> - Impossible to stop the media during a play. DISK ERROR - ID STILL RECORDING: <ID> - Impossible to stop the media during a record. DISK ERROR - ID TRANSFERRED: <ID> - Impossible to play an ID from the video server it was already transferred. DISK ERROR - ILLEGAL VALUE - Bad value sent to the video server in a command. DISK ERROR - INVALID ID: <ID> - The format of the ID is not correct. DISK ERROR - INVALID PORT - Configuration conflict with port. DISK ERROR - NO AUDIO INPUT - There's no input audio flow in the video server. DISK ERROR - NO REFERENCE INPUT - The video file server has had the reference video removed. DISK ERROR - NO VIDEO INPUT - No video input in the video disk. DISK ERROR - NO VIDEO PORT OPEN - There's no port configured for the playout. DISK ERROR - NOT IN CUED STATE - The state of the media in the device server is not already cued. DISK ERROR - PORT NOT ACTIVE - The port of the video server is not active. The command won't be run. DISK ERROR - PORT NOT IDLE - The port of the video server is not well reinitialized. DISK ERROR - PORT PLAYING OR ACTIVE - The port is already used for a command. Impossible to use it for a new one. DISK ERROR - SYSTEM ERROR - General problem in the video server. DISK ERROR - VIDEO PORT DOWN - The playout port is down. DISK ERROR - WRONG PORT TYPE - Wrong port assignment in the video server. DISK ERROR-CUE OR OPERATION FAILED: <ID> - Impossible to cue an event in the video server. This message is used for another command. DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS CHECKSUM ERROR - Time out between the device server and the video server. Problem with the checksum of the video server answer Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 269 of 288

270 Appendix C DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS FRAMING ERROR - Time out between the device server and the video server. Problem with the format of the video server answer. DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS OVER FLOW - Time out between the device server and the video server. Problem with the format of the video server answer. DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS PARITY ERROR - Time out between the device server and the video server. Problem with the parity bit of the video server answer. DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS TIME OUT - Time out between the device server and the video server. No response from the video server. DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS UNDEFINED ERROR - Undefined error from the video server. DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT - The door stayed open too long. DUPLICATE TAPE: <ID> In BIN: <Bin Number> - There at least two identical ID in the bins of the cart Machine. ELEVATOR OFF LINE - The robotic elevator is in an offline state. ELEVATOR REPLY TIMEOUT - The elevator of the cart machine didn't move on time. EMERGENCY STOP ACTIVE - Manual intervention has removed the device from service. ERROR - DEVICE ACCESS ERROR - Access denied in the device. ERROR - DEVICE OUT OF MEMORY - The memory of the device is full. ERROR - DISK CACHE RECORDER FAILED ID: <ID> - Problem with the recording during the cache. ERROR - DISK FAILED PLAY ID: <ID> - Problem to play a media from the video server. ERROR - DISK FAILED RECORD ID: <ID> - Problem to record a media to the video server. ERROR - LOST DISK REPLY(S) - Problem with the disk of the video server. ERROR - RESENT LAST COMMAND - A command have not been executed and lost from the memory of the video server. ERROR - UNKNOWN RESPONSE - The answer from the video server is wrong. EVENT NOT PLAYED - INVALID OFFSET ON SECONDARY - A secondary GPI event that was to be run twice on the same primary event had an overlapping start time on the subsequent GPI event. EVENT NOT PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND - The event was unable to play because the ID was not found in any device EVENT NOT PLAYED - MEDIA NOT THREADED - The event was unable to play because the media was not threaded into a device. EVENT NOT PLAYED - NOT CUED IN TIME - The event was unable to play because it was unable to cue. EVENT NOT PLAYED - SKIP ISSUED - The event began to play, but the operator intervened by invoking the skip command. EVENT NOT PLAYED - SECONDARY MEDIA MISSING - GMT Error. A GMT transfer failed because the secondary events were not valid, such as in a baseband transfer Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 270 of 288

271 Appendix C EVENT SKIPPED - ABNORMAL END - An event encountered an end of media condition such as end of tape or end of recorded clip. The media stopped playing and the next event was run. (If a Protect copy exists this message is not generated) EVENT UNABLE TO CUE - NO SOM - The Start of Message in the event is invalid for the material. Cannot cue the material to the specified location EVENT UNABLE TO RECORD, REC INHIBIT ON - The device has recording disabled. Typically, a VTR with the rec inhibit tab set FETCH OR INSERT TO EMPTY OR FULL LOCATION - Try to insert in full bin or try to take a tape from an empty bin. GMT Media Transfer Failed, Time = - A failure was reported back to the list for a media transfer by a requester. The media was not transferred. GMT-Abort event due to archive or Disk time out - Abort event due to the archive manager or the video file server timeout. GMT-Baseband device I/O failure - A problem occurred during the baseband transfer. GMT-Event aborted during running state - The running GMT event aborted during execution. GMT-Event ID not found in source device - Event ID not found in the source device. GMT-Found Buffer full during Global Delete - A buffer overflow error occurred during a global delete. GMT-Found unknown/unimplemented disk command - Found unknown / unimplemented VDCP command during transfer. GMT-ID already existed in destination device - The media already exists in the device storage of the destination device. GMT-List event cut or Ran Short - An event on the GMT list was cut. GMT-Listed ID not found in Distributor collection - The media wasn't found by the distributor. GMT-Missing Disk Handle while needed - There is no disk handle parameter available for the activity. GMT-No Fiber Distributor to do the MOV after BB transfer - No fibre distributor available to do the move after the baseband transfer has occurred. GMT-No Fiber Distributor to do the MOV after CFA - There is no fibre distributor to do a copy after the move from archive has occurred. GMT-No Global delete targets configured - No global delete targets are configured in the distributor. GMT-Request success - The request succeeded. GMT-Requester lost communication with Distributor - The requester lost communications with the distributor GMT-Transfer Success - Distributor transfer media in Fiber/Archive/WAN routing mode is successful. GMT-VACP ERR COMM FAIL - VACP response from archive manager. Problem of communication Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 271 of 288

272 Appendix C GMT-VACP ERR ID EXISTS - VACP response from archive manager. The ID is already existing. GMT-VACP ERR ID NOT FOUND - VACP response from archive manager. The ID was not in a device storage. The archive manager cannot find the specified ID. GMT-VACP ERR INIT - VACP response from archive manager. Problem at the initialization. GMT-VACP ERR INSUFF MEMORY - VACP response from archive manager. Problem of memory. GMT-VACP ERR INSUFF SVCS - Insufficient services. GMT-VACP ERR MACRO FAIL - The Archive manager reports (CFA/CTA) macro command is failed. GMT-VACP ERR OP COMPLETED - Inverse of Incomplete Operation. GMT-VACP ERR OPERATION ABORTED - VACP response from archive manager. The command was aborted because of an unspecified error. GMT-VACP ERR PARM INVALID - VACP response from archive manager. Bad parameters in the command. GMT-VACP ERR PARTITION SMALL - The partition is to small to hold the material. GMT-VACP ERR PORT_BUSY - VACP response from archive manager. The port is busy. Impossible to run the command. GMT-VACP ERR RW FAILURE - VACP response from archive manager. Problem on read write mode. GMT-VACP ERR SETUSERID - VACP Client is using wrong user ID to do the login. GMT-VACP ERR TAPE UNAVAIL - VACP response from archive manager. No available tape to perform the operation. GMT-VACP ERR TIMEOUT - VACP response from archive manager. Time out on a command. GMT-VACP ERR UNKNOWN Command Received - VACP response from archive manager. The command is not a valid one. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_CHECKSUM - VACP response from archive manager. The checksum indicates an error in transmission. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_FRAMING - VACP response from archive manager. A framing error was detected in the message. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_ID_CONFLICT - VACP response from archive manager. The ID being sent to the archive already exists. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_ILLEGAL_VALUE - VACP response from archive manager. The response is a NAK, as a result of an illegal value being sent. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_OVERRUN - VACP response from archive manager. An over run condition was detected in the message. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_PARITY - VACP response from archive manager. A parity error was detected in the message. GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_UNDEFINED - VACP response from archive manager. The response is a NAK, of undefined error type Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 272 of 288

273 Appendix C GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_UNSUPPORTED - VACP response from archive manager. The command is not supported by the archive manager. GMT-VACP SUCCESS - VACP response from archive manager. Clip moved successfully. GMT-VDCP Archive disk handle not configured - VDCP archive disk handle not configured. GMT-VDCP_SUCCESS - VDCP response from archive manager. The command ran with success. HARD ERROR - A Sony Protocol VTR returned back the Hard Error bit enabled indicating some physical problem with the VTR or Tape. HARDWARE TROUBLE BUZZER ALARM - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the buzzer bit set in the extended status. HEAD STILL IN PLAY - The system resource event attempted to assign a device that was in play. The assignment did not take place. HUB OFF LINE - Attempted a load port command with no load port installed. Attempted a transfer command with no transfer mechanism installed. ID DOES NOT MATCH, MACRO LSB <Error Code> - ID doesn't match. INCORRECT SIZE AT LOCATION - Insert command attempted to an incorrect size location. INTERNAL ERROR - BAD COMMAND GENERATED - The format of the command is wrong. INVALID EVENT COMMAND - The system resource event was not valid and could not be decoded by the list. INVALID HEAD NUMBER - The minor device head specified by the system resource event was not a valid head number. Keyer number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Keyer. Keyer number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Keyer. List will stop on next event - Manual intervention occurred, List will stop on next event, id field is empty. LOAD PORT FULL - CANNOT UNLOAD VTR - Load port is full in the procart. LOAD PORT INDEX, OPEN, CLOSED ARM IN FRONT?? - Load port problem, it can be a bad reinitialization, or the load port is open or the arm is blocked just in front. LOAD PORT NOT INDEXED - Bad load port initialization. LOAD PORT STALL NOT CLEARED - Tape were not put out of the load port. MACRO BUSY ERROR - A Sony Cart machine returned back a status of Macro Busy on a macro command. This error condition should never occur in a Sony Cart Machine. MACRO DISTURBED - A Sony Cart machine returned back via the protocol that a Marco Command was either terminated or disturbed. MACRO NOT FOUND, MACRO LSB <Error Code> - Couldn't find macro. MAIN ROBOT - General robot problem. MAIN ROBOT, CLAW 1 - Problem with the gripper 1 of the robot Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 273 of 288

274 Appendix C MAIN ROBOT, CLAW 2 - Problem with the gripper 2 of the robot. MAIN ROBOT, X AXIS - Problem with the X Axis arm robot. MAIN ROBOT, Y AXIS - Problem with the Y Axis arm robot. Manual Intervention of System - Indicates Manual Intervention on the switcher. MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - DURING PREROLL - A failure of the primary media occurred during pre-roll of the media. No switching to a protect copy could occur at this time. MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - PROTECT COPY NOT PLAYING - A failure of the primary media occurred but the backup media was unable to be switched into the on-air video stream. MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - PROTECT COPY SWITCHED - A failure of the primary media caused the backup media (Protect) to be switched into the on-air video stream. MECHANICAL INTERFERENCE - Mechanical interference. MEDIA DEVICE NOT PROPERLY INITIALIZED - The media wasn't initialized properly. MEDIA UNABLE TO CUE - ID: <ID> - Device is unable to cue. MODE SET TO DISABLE MOVEMENT WHEN DOOR OPEN - In the Procart cart machine you can enable or not a sound indicating that the door in the Procart cart machine is open and that you have to close it. MOVE WITH LIGHT CURTAIN ACTIVE - While moving the robotics, an interruption of the light curtain was detected. MULTIPLE GRIPPER ERRORS MULTIPLE GRIPPER ERRORS, ARM <Error Code> PLACED OUT OF SERVICE - Gripper is out of service. NAK RETURNED FROM SWITCHER - The switcher responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK. NO ANNOTATION EVENTS TO RECORD - The secondary record event was not inserted. No record. NO CASSETTE IN GRIPPER - Procart cart machine. No tape in the gripper. NO MORE BINS TO STORE MEDIA - The bins in the cart machine are all full. There is no more room for tapes in the cart machine. NO VTR AT LOCATION - There is no VTR installed at the physical location. ON AIR EVENT PACKED - LIST WILL STOP - The on-air event was playing, and the packing of the list forced the deletion of the event. ON AIR EVENT WAS CUT - The on-air event was playing, and it was deleted from the playlist ON AIR EVENT WAS EJECTED - Media was ejected during playout ON AIR EVENT WAS RECUED - The event began to play, but the operator intervened by invoking the recue command. OUTPORT IS FULL - PLEASE EMPTY IT - The I/O port of the cart machine is full. It must be emptied so that the current ejection process continues Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 274 of 288

275 Appendix C PGM crosspoint number Audio switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio crosspoint number. PGM crosspoint number Audio switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio crosspoint number. PGM crosspoint number Video switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on video crosspoint number. PGM crosspoint number Video switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on video crosspoint number. PLAY ISSUED - MEDIA IN LOCAL - The device received the play command, but the returned status indicates that it did not go into play mode. PLAYOUT TIMES OVERLAP - Events overlapped in the transmission list. PRESETEFFECT BEGIN VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - Beginning of PresetEffect. PRESETEFFECT END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End of PresetEffect. PROGRAM/INTERFACE ERROR - SYSTEM ALARM - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the system alarm bit set in the extended status. PROTECT COPY NOT USABLE REMOVED - The protect copy of the media was removed or ejected, but the primary copy was not. The media was not on-air. PROTECT MEDIA NOT PLAYED - NOT CUED - The secondary event was unable to play because the media was not cued in time. PROTECT NAME NOT VALID - The major device to be used as a protect device, specified by the system resource event could not be found. PUT TAPE FROM VTR: <Error Code> INTO BIN: <Bin Number> - Problem with an unthread tape for a VTR to a bin in the odetics cart. PUT TAPE: <ID> FROM BIN: <Bin Number> INTO VTR: <Error Code> - Problem with a threading tape in a VTR of an odetics cart. RECORD ENDED PREMATURELY - The event for a record operation terminated abnormally. RECORD EVENT WAS CUT - The record event was recording, and it was deleted from the record list. RECORD NOT STARTED - Event failed to start. REFERENCE VIDEO MISSING - The VTR has lost the reference video signal. REMOVE TAPE FROM VTR, INSERT VIA I/O PORT - Somebody put a tape manually into a VTR instead of the load port. REMOVE TAPES FROM VTRS, INSERT VIA I/O PORT - Somebody put tapes manually into a VTR instead of the load port. RESEAT CASSETTE IN BIN: <Bin Number> AND INIT ROBOT - Put the tape in its bin and reinitialize the robot. Return to Automated Control of System - Indicates the switcher is back to the list control. ROBOT WARNING number V<ErrorCode> VTR number <ID> - Problem with a VTR from the MARC cart machine Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 275 of 288

276 Appendix C SERIAL CONTROL WENT INTO AUTOMATION - The device is now under automation control. This is the reverse of AUTO_ENABLE_OFF. SERIAL CONTROL WENT INTO LOCAL - The device is no longer under automation control. Communications exist, but the device will not respond to commands. SETKEYON END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End of DoSetKeyOn. SETMIXON END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End of DoSetMixOn. STANDBYON ISSUED - MEDIA IN LOCAL - The device received the standby command, but the returned status indicates that it did not go into standby mode SWITCHER COMMAND QUEUE FULL <Error Number> - From PutQueue, when queue is full. SWITCHER DID NOT RESPOND TO REQUEST - The switcher is no longer communicating. SYSTEM ERROR: NO DATAGRAM NCBS - DOS Server network error, obsolete error TAKE WAS SENT VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - From Background, just after sending take. TAPE TROUBLE - A Sony Protocol VTR returned back the Tape Trouble bit enabled indicating some problem with the tape. TARGETING OR DOOR OPEN - Procart cart machine. The door is either open or the tape could be put in the VTR. THREAD FAILURE - DOOR OPEN OR SYSTEM DOWN - <Error Code> - The threading of a tape into the cart VTR has failed. The elevator may have become jammed or the VTR jammed. TRANSITION - INPUT CROSSPOINT: <CrosspointInput> <-> OUTPUT CROSSPOINT: <CrosspointOutput> - From transition or/and control panel. TRANSPORT MECHANISM MUST BE EMPTIED MANUALLY - Gripper has to be emptied manually. TROUBLE IN DEVICE SERVO - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the servo alarm bit set in the extended status. TROUBLE WITH OUTPORT - PLEASE CHECK - On those cart machines that have an I/O port, attempting to put a tape into the I/O port failed because of a hardware problem with the I/O port. UNABLE TO ASSIGN HEAD - Using the system resource assignment event, the device that was to be assigned to the list could not be assigned. UNABLE TO RELEASE HEAD - Using the system resource assignment event, the device that was to be released from the list could not be released. UNKNOWN MARC ERROR - Unknown MARC cart machine problem. UNKNOWN RESPONSE FROM CART <Error Code> - Undefined problem from the LMS cart machine. UNKNOWN THREAD ERROR - <Error Code> - A Sony Cart returned an unknown Macro completion code when the threading of a tape into a VTR failed Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 276 of 288

277 Appendix C USERBITS NOT VALID, DEVICE NOT SET TO EJECT - A VTR was set to keep the tape even if an eject was issued, but the userbit associated with the tape was not valid. VENUS NOT LOCKED TO TIMECODE - Venus doesn't get any timecode. VIDEO DATA ERROR LEVEL NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned back an Video Data error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on the tape the error occurred. VIDEO READ AFTER WRITE NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned back an Video Raw Verify error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on the tape the error occurred. VTR COMMAND TIMEOUT - The VTR command wasn't made on time. VTR EJECT FAILURE - CHECK FOR JAM - <Error Code> - The VTR did not eject the tape when requested. VTR ERROR number<bin Number> - Problem with a tape between the VTR and the bin of the cart. VTR PROBLEM - CHECK FOR JAM - <Error Code> - A VTR in a cart machine had a failure and is off-line. VTR STATUS : <Bin Number> - <Bin Number> - Status of the VTR returned to the device server. WARNING-SPOT SHORTER THAN SCHEDULED: <ID> - The spot in the video server is too short to play well the next event Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 277 of 288

278 Appendix D Appendix D Rebuilding an Air Client Perform the procedures in the order presented below. Back Rev After purchasing your replacement hard drive OR replacement PC, you will need to back rev your new item to either Windows 2000 or NT depending on which system your former box was on. Important Windows XP Note: If your house is on XP already, then you can skip to Add NetBEUI and TCP/IP Protocols. Add NetBEUI and TCP/IP Protocols 1. Make sure you log in as Administrator, pw harris (exactly like all your other automation PCs) 2. Right click my computer, set workgroup to HARRISNET, and PC name to ACLIENTX (where X is the number of that client) 3. Add the NetBEUI protocol under the General tab within Network Connections. Go into Control Panel and select Network Connections. Right click on your Local Area Connection, and under the General tab you will see the option for installing a specific network component type. Scroll down and select NetBEUI Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 278 of 288

279 Appendix D 4. Add the TCP/IP protocol (if using SQL), and make certain to use a valid and unique IP address. Install Lana Config Utility Install the Lana Config utility. 1. To install Lana Config utility, double click on lanacfg_wu.exe. 2. Click OK. When the installation is completed the Install Completed Successfully message box is displayed. 3. Click OK on the message box. 4. Click on the Windows Start button, and then select Run. 5. Write CMD in the edit box, and then click OK. 6. At the prompt type: lanacfg, and then press <Enter>. The following window will appear: 7. At the prompt type: lanacfg showlanapaths, and then press <Enter>. The following window appears: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 279 of 288

280 Appendix D IMPORTANT: The binding of Net BEUI Protocol with the NIC card used to connect the CLIENT [SNMP PROXY CLIENT, AIR CLIENT, and or MEDIA CLIENT] to the Device Server must be set to 0. In the image below the NetBEUI protocol LANA number is set to 2, it MUST be changed to 0. See highlighted portion of image. 8. At the prompt type: lanacfg setlananumber (whatever the value is currently, in this case 2 ) to the new lana number, value which should be 0, and then press <Enter>. See the example below. 9. At the prompt type: lanacfg rewritelanainfo, and then press <Enter>. The following box will appear Map Network drives Map two network drives. 1. Right clicking on My Computer and then select Map network drives. 2. Map a D and an E drive, and select Reconnect at logon for both. D Drive: 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 280 of 288

281 Appendix D E Drive: 3. Now that you have changed the number sequence, reboot your system. Install and Configure ODBC If using SQL, install and configure ODBC, BEFORE installing any client software. If using MySQL Express 5.0, for details reference: SQL Server 2005 Express Installation Guide. If using SQL2008, for details reference: ADC SQLServer 2008 Installation Guide. Note: Air Client v supports connectivity to SQL2008 on a fileserver with Microsoft Windows Server This support is for new customer installs only. About Installing the Air Client software 1. After the reboot, you will want to install the Air Client software. It should match your previously existing version [or it may be a slightly newer version for you, you will however want to make certain that ALL clients (if you have more than one Air Client), are running the same version software Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 281 of 288

282 Appendix D 2. As you install, remember to select the correct database type (whether it be Btrieve or SQL). After the installation you will want to make certain that the shortcuts Properties are set up correctly. So you will need to type the following string in the Target box. After MAIN. Type: IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32, **Remember to include a space between MAIN, and IDLEN, and another one between the first 32 and the TITLEN.** (See example on next page) *NOTE: The client name should be the same as the PC s name just without the hyphen. Example: PC windows login = ACLIENT-1, session login for Client Application = ACLIENT Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 282 of 288

283 Appendix E Appendix E System Timing The purpose of this section is to provide a step-by-step guide to system timing to ensure frame accurate operation of the ADC system. If a customer says that his Video Server is playing out several frames late and needs to adjust the "number of frames to send play early" parameter, the cause is likely to be the frame inaccuracy of the source VTR or the latency of the router. The following process will ensure the frame accuracy of the source VTR, the router and the Video Server. Requirements For all tests, a record capable VTR not under automation control is required. This VTR should be fed with time-of-day timecode from the same source as the Device Server. The VTR should be set to external timecode generation. This ensures that any recording made with this VTR will have time-of-day timecode embedded in the recording. The video input to the record VTR should be an output of the router. Temporarily configure the A/V routing tables so that the switch-only device (see below) and the playback VTR are both switched to the same destination on the router - the input to the record VTR. Verify the source VTR and router's accuracy Steps 1 and 2 may be done simultaneously. 1. Set the list pre-roll for 5 seconds. This ensures that the VTR is frame accurate. All Media Lists and GMT Lists that use VTRs or cart machines as sources should have their pre-roll set to 5 seconds to allow VTRs to get up to speed. 2. Prepare a test playlist similar to the one below (Fig. 1). The essential elements are a VTR event sandwiched between two switch-only events. The VTR s timecode window superimposed output must be sent to the router input for this VTR. The SOM of the tape should be to the nearest 10 seconds, as should the hard start time. In an NTSC drop frame environment, avoid a start time at zero seconds, zero frames. 3. Start the recording VTR. Roll the test playlist and allow the three events to play out. Validating Frame Accuracy Once the recording has completed, two things may be checked. 1. First, check that the VTR was playing frame-accurately. Rewind the recording to any section of the VTR event. The seconds and frames in the timecode window on the monitor should be the same as the seconds and frames displayed on the VTR which has 2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 283 of 288

284 Appendix E performed the recording. If they are not, then the playback VTR's "Sync Adjust" parameter needs to be adjusted. 2. Next, the frame accuracy of the router may be checked. The first frame of video from the VTR event should end in x0:00 and the last frame should be x9:24 (for PAL) or x9:29 (for NTSC). If these values are incorrect, the latency of the router needs to be adjusted. For example, if the first frame is x0:02 and the last frame is x0:01 the router is switching two frames late. Adjust the router's latency to 2 frames (Fig. 3) and repeat the test Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 284 of 288

285 Appendix E Verify the Video Servers' accuracy Now that the source VTR and router have been verified to be frame accurate, the Video Server's record and playout ports can be checked. Using either GMT or the Media Client, the playback VTR used in the first step should be configured as the source device. A list pre-roll of 5 seconds should again be used to ensure that the source device behaves consistently. Ideally, the same 10-second clip should be used along with the superimposed output of the source VTR as before. Autocopy (using the Media Client) or allow GMT to record the clip to the Video Server being tested. Once the clip has been recorded, a playlist similar to the list created earlier should be prepared, but with the playback VTR replaced with the playback Video Server port. Make a recording of the three playout events as before. Again, the playback of the recorded sequence will determine two things the frame accuracy of the recording and of the playback. That the seconds and frames of the timecode of both the timecode window and VTR timecode display are synchronized does not necessarily mean that all is well. This could mean that the recording is a frame late and the playback is a frame early. Shuttle to the start of the Video Server clip. Is the first frame the correct frame with a timecode of x0:00? Shuttle to the end of the Video Server clip. Is the last frame x9:24 (for PAL) or x9:29 (for NTSC)? If the answer to both is yes then the system is correctly timed. If the answer to either is no or the seconds and frames are not synchronized, then a timing adjustment needs to be made. Ensure that the recording will be frame accurate by playing back the clip from the Video Server with no events before or after it. In addition, switch the Video Server output to the recording VTR before this event is run to ensure that no crosspoint switching is occurring. This does not need to be a hard start event but does need to be recorded on the VTR. Is the first frame x0:00 and the last x0:24 or x0:29? If not, the recording is not frame accurate and the "number of frames to send record early" parameter should be adjusted accordingly on the Video Server's record port. Once this timing is correct, the test with two switch-only events either side of the Video Server event may be repeated Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 285 of 288

286 Appendix E Any error in this test will therefore be in the playback. This may be remedied by adjusting the "number of frames to send play early" parameter on the playout port of the Video Server Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential 22-April-2014 Page 286 of 288